Pentax Digital Camera 16926 User Manual

Digital Camera  
Operating Manual  
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read  
the Operating Manual before using the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To users of this camera  
• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong  
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.  
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as  
radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage the stored data, or  
affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.  
• The liquid crystal panel used in the display is manufactured using extremely  
high precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or  
better, you should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate  
or may illuminate when they should not. However, this has no effect on the  
recorded image.  
• A band of light may appear on the display if the camera is aimed at a bright  
subject. This is known as a smear, but it is not a malfunction.  
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen in this manual  
are different from the actual product.  
• In this manual, SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards and SDXC Memory  
Cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards.  
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or  
a Macintosh hereafter.  
• In this manual, the term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries used for this  
camera and accessories.  
Using Your Camera Safely  
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When  
using this product, we request your special attention regarding  
items marked with the following symbols.  
This symbol indicates that violating this item  
could cause serious personal injuries.  
Warning  
This symbol indicates that violating this item  
could cause minor or medium personal injuries,  
or loss of property.  
Caution  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the Camera  
Warning  
• Do not attempt to take the camera apart or modify the camera. High  
voltages are present within the camera, and there is a danger of electric  
shock if the camera is taken apart.  
• If the inside of the camera should become exposed as a result of, for  
example, the camera being dropped, please do not under any  
circumstances touch such exposed portions, as there is a danger of  
receiving an electric shock.  
• Wrapping the strap of the camera around your neck is also dangerous.  
Please take care that small children do not hang the strap around their  
necks.  
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop  
use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your  
nearest PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause  
a fire or electric shock.  
Caution  
• Do not place your finger on the flash when it is discharging as there is a  
risk of burns.  
• Do not discharge the flash while it is touching your clothing as there is a  
risk of discoloring.  
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use, so please take care, as  
there is a risk of low temperature burns if such portions are held for long  
periods of time.  
• Should the LCD be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be  
careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin, in your eyes, or in  
your mouth.  
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the  
camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality,  
stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Battery Charger and the AC Adapter  
Warning  
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for  
this product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger  
or AC adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery  
charger or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a  
fire, electric shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100-  
240V AC.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electric  
shock.  
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other  
abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue its use and consult a  
PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or  
electric shock.  
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX  
Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric  
shock.  
• If a thunder storm should occur while using the battery charger or AC  
adapter, unplug the AC plug cord and discontinue use. Continuing to use  
the product can cause damage to the equipment, fire, or electric shock.  
• Wipe off the plug of the AC plug cord if it becomes covered with dust. Dust  
on the plug may cause a fire.  
Caution  
• Do not place heavy objects on the AC plug cord, allow heavy objects to  
drop onto it or allow the AC plug cord to become damaged due to  
excessive bending. If the AC plug cord becomes damaged, consult a  
PENTAX Service Center.  
• Do not short or touch the output terminals of the product while it is still  
plugged in.  
• Do not plug in the AC plug cord with wet hands. This can cause an electric  
shock.  
• Do not subject the product to strong impacts or allow it to drop onto a hard  
surface. This can cause a malfunction.  
• Do not use the battery charger to charge a battery other than a  
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92. This can cause overheating,  
explosion, or battery charger failure.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To reduce the risk of hazards, use only a CSA/UL certified power supply cord  
set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end  
with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA  
configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector  
body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.  
About the Battery  
Warning  
• Be sure to store the battery out of the reach of small children. Placing it in  
their mouths may cause an electric shock.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, it  
may cause a loss of sight. Flush your eyes with clean water and get  
medical attention immediately. Do not rub them.  
Caution  
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may  
cause an explosion or fire.  
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an  
explosion or leakage.  
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or  
begins to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and -  
contacts of the battery.  
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an  
explosion or fire.  
If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it  
may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.  
• Precautions for D-LI92 Battery Usage:  
BATTERY MAY EXPLODE OR FIRE IF MISTREATED.  
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.  
- DO NOT CHARGE EXCEPT SPECIFIED CHARGING CONDITION.  
- DO NOT HEAT ABOVE 140°F / 60°C, OR SHORT CIRCUIT.  
- DO NOT CRUSH OR MODIFY.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep the Camera and Accessories Out of the Reach of Small  
Children  
Warning  
• Be sure to keep the camera and its accessories out of the reach of small  
children.  
1. Injuries may result from the product falling or from unexpected  
movement.  
2. Suffocation may result from wrapping the strap around the neck.  
3. Small accessories such as battery or an SD Memory Card may be  
swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is  
accidentally swallowed.  
Care to be Taken During Handling  
Before Starting Use  
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included  
in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.  
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still  
working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at  
a wedding or when traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be  
guaranteed if recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer,  
etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media  
(SD Memory Card), etc.  
• The lens on this camera is not interchangeable. The lens is not removable.  
About the Battery and Battery Charger  
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance.  
Avoid storing it especially in high temperatures.  
If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the  
battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s service life.  
Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.  
• The AC plug cord supplied with the camera is for exclusive use with the  
battery charger D-BC92. Do not use it with any other equipment.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cautions when Carrying and Using the Camera  
Hot and humid places should be avoided. Particular care should be taken  
regarding vehicles, which can become very hot inside.  
• Ensure that the camera is not subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks,  
or pressure as this may cause damage, malfunction, or a loss in waterproof  
performance. Place the camera on a cushion for protection when the  
camera is subjected to the vibrations of a motorbike, car, ship, etc. If the  
camera is subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure, take  
your camera to your nearest PENTAX Service Center and have it checked.  
• The temperature range in which the camera can be used is -10°C to 40°C  
(14°F to 104°F).  
• The liquid crystal display will become black at high temperatures but will  
return to normal at normal temperatures.  
• The response speed of the liquid crystal display becomes slow at low  
temperatures. This is due to the properties of the liquid crystal and is not a  
malfunction.  
• If the camera is subjected to rapid temperature changes, condensation  
may form on the inside and outside of the camera. Therefore put the  
camera in a bag or plastic bag and take the camera out when the difference  
in temperature has subsided.  
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts.  
These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off  
any rain or water drops.  
• Please do not press forcefully on the display. This could cause it to break  
or malfunction.  
• Be careful not to sit down with the camera in your back pocket as this may  
damage the exterior of the camera or the display.  
• When using a tripod with the camera, be careful not to overtighten the  
screw in the tripod socket on the camera.  
About Repairs  
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol or  
benzene.  
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens. Never use a  
spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Storage  
• Avoid storing the camera where pesticides and chemicals are handled.  
Remove the camera from its case and store it in a well-ventilated place to  
prevent the camera from becoming moldy during storage.  
Others  
• Periodic checks are recommended every 1 to 2 years in order to maintain  
high performance.  
the SD Memory Card.  
• Please note that deleting images, or formatting the SD Memory Cards or  
the built-in memory does not completely erase the original data. Deleted  
files can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software.  
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regarding Waterproof, Dustproof, and  
Shockproof Design  
• This camera is provided with a waterproof/dustproof design complying with  
JIS waterproof grade 8 and JIS dustproof grade 6 (equivalent to IP68).  
• The camera satisfies the PENTAX drop test (1.5 m height onto a 5 cm thick  
plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock  
testing.  
• The camera satisfies the PENTAX test for the waterproof, dustproof, and  
shockproof performance, but this does not guarantee it will remain free of  
trouble or damages.  
• Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to  
impact such as being dropped or hit.  
Precautions Before Using the Camera in the  
Water  
Check the Following Before Going Near the Water  
• Make sure that there are no cracks or scratches on the rubber seal of the  
battery/card and terminal covers.  
Packing contact surface  
Waterproof packing  
Packing contact surface  
Waterproof packing  
• Make sure there are no foreign objects (dust, sand, hair, lint or liquid) on  
the rubber seals or the surface they contact before closing the battery/card  
and terminal covers. Wipe off any foreign objects with a clean lint-free cloth.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Close the battery/card and terminal covers properly until they click.  
Otherwise water may get in and damage the camera.  
Be Careful Near the Water  
• Avoid opening the battery/card and terminal covers when near the  
waterside or with wet hands. Wait until the camera is completely dry before  
changing the battery or the SD Memory Card. Avoid changing the battery  
or card where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and make sure that  
your hands are dry.  
• The camera will sink if dropped in water, so be sure to attach the strap and  
slip the strap over your wrist when using the camera in or near water.  
• To enhance the waterproof performance of the camera, the front of the lens  
is protected by glass. As any dirt or water on the glass will affect the quality  
of pictures taken, the glass should be kept clean at all times.  
Precautions When Using the Camera in the Water  
• Do not use the camera deeper than 10 meters underwater. Do not use the  
camera underwater for more than 120 minutes consecutively.  
• Do not open the battery/card and terminal covers underwater.  
• Do not use in hot water or in a hot spring.  
• Do not apply excessive force to the camera, for example diving into water  
with it. Doing so may compromise the waterproof performance of the  
camera or cause the covers to open.  
• Leaving the camera on the sand at the beach may cause the camera to  
exceed its operating temperature or cause the speaker or microphone to  
become blocked with sand.  
• Avoid subjecting the camera to substantial vibrations, shocks, or pressure  
as this may cause a loss in waterproof performance. If the camera is  
subjected to substantial vibrations, shocks or pressure, take your camera  
to your nearest PENTAX Service Center and have it checked.  
• Avoid getting sunscreen or sun oil on the camera as it may cause  
discoloration of the surface. If any oil gets on the camera, wash it off  
immediately with warm water.  
• Sudden and extreme changes in temperature may cause condensation to  
form in and on the camera. Keep the camera in a bag or case to reduce the  
difference in temperature.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Precautions After Using the Camera in the Water  
• Do not open the battery/card cover or terminal cover if the camera is wet.  
Wipe off any water with a clean lint-free cloth.  
• The inside surface of the covers may get wet when they are opened. Wipe  
off any water that is on the cover.  
• Wiping off the camera while there is sand or dust on it may scratch the  
surface of the camera. Make sure that the battery/card cover and terminal  
cover are firmly closed before washing the camera in tap water. After  
washing the camera, dry it with a soft cloth.  
• Wipe off any dirt or sand on the waterproof packing or the packing contact  
surface. The camera’s waterproof performance may be compromised by  
loose packing or cracks or dents in the packing or packing contact surface.  
If there is any such damage, contact your nearest PENTAX Service  
Center.  
• If the camera is very dirty or after it has been used in the sea, make sure  
that it is turned off and the battery/card and terminal covers are firmly  
closed before rinsing it under running tap water or leaving it in a bowl of  
clean water for a short time (2 or 3 minutes).  
• Avoid cleaning with agents such as soapy water, mild detergents, or  
alcohol as this may compromise the waterproof performance of the  
camera.  
• To maintain the waterproof performance of the camera, you are  
recommended to change the waterproof packing once a year. Contact your  
nearest PENTAX Service Center regarding changing the packing. (A  
charge will be made.)  
• The camera’s accessories are not waterproof.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taking Pictures of Dark Scenes (Night Scene, Night Scene  
Portrait, Digital SR, Fireworks, and Candlelight Modes)..........90  
Taking Pictures of Sports and Leisure Activities (Surf & Snow/  
Sport Mode) .............................................................................97  
Taking a Series of Pictures (Continuous Shooting/Burst  
Shooting)................................................................................104  
Taking Pictures with Automatic Exposure Adjustment  
(Auto Bracketing) ...................................................................110  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Underwater Pictures (Underwater Mode/Underwater  
Movie Mode) ..........................................................................148  
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels and Frame Rate  
for Movies...............................................................................152  
Recording a Movie from Pictures Taken at a Set Interval  
(Interval Movie) ......................................................................154  
Zoom In on the Subject’s Face Automatically (Face Close-up  
Playback) ...............................................................................174  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In this manual, the method for operating the four-way controller is shown  
in illustrations, such as in the one below.  
2 or  
or  
or  
4
5
3 or  
The meanings of the symbols used in this Operating Manual are  
explained below.  
Indicates the reference page number for an explanation of the  
related operation.  
1
Indicates information that is useful to know.  
Indicates precautions to be taken when operating the camera.  
This is the mode for taking still pictures and movies. In this  
manual, “Still Picture Capture Mode” is the mode for taking still  
pictures while “C mode” is the mode for taking movies.  
A Mode  
This is the mode for viewing still pictures and playing back movies  
and sound files.  
Q Mode  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Composition of the Operating Manual  
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.  
1 Getting Started –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
This chapter explains what you need to do after purchasing the camera  
before you start taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the instructions.  
2 Common Operations ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains common operations such as the functions of the buttons and  
how to use the menus. For more details, refer to the respective chapters below.  
3 Taking Pictures ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains the various ways of capturing images and how to set  
the relevant functions.  
4 Playing Back and Deleting Images–––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains how to view still pictures and movies on the camera or  
on a TV and how to delete images, sound files, and movies from the camera.  
5 Editing and Printing Images ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains the various ways of printing still pictures and how to  
edit images with the camera.  
6 Recording and Playing Back Sound –––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains how to record sound files or add sound (a voice  
memo) to an image and how to play back sound files.  
7 Settings–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains how to set camera-related functions.  
8 Connecting to a Computer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes  
installation instructions and a general overview of the provided software.  
9 Appendix––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
This chapter deals with troubleshooting and lists the optional accessories.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera Features  
In addition to basic picture-taking, this camera has a variety of shooting  
modes to suit different situations. This section describes how to make the  
most of the key features of your camera. For details on how to operate the  
camera, look at the table of contents or in the index for specific functions.  
Suitable for Outdoor Activities  
This camera is both waterproof and dustproof and has a tough body.  
You need not worry about sprays of water while fishing or unexpected  
rain or dust while trekking.  
Functions that expand photo  
opportunities to the sea, the hills,  
and the rivers  
• Waterproof at a depth of 10  
meters (32.8 ft.)  
• Take pictures underwater for  
up to two hours.  
• Covers can be locked*1  
• Shockproof performance*2  
• Water repellent coating on the  
lens cover glass.  
*1 This camera has locks for the battery/card and terminal covers. The  
battery compartment and the card and terminal compartment are not  
waterproof or dustproof. Lock the covers properly before approaching  
anyplace that is wet or dirty.  
*2 The camera satisfies the PENTAX drop test (1.5 m height onto a 5 cm  
thick plywood surface) complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method  
516.5-Shock testing.  
• Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed to  
impact such as being dropped or hit.  
• The camera is not guaranteed to be free of trouble or damages under  
every condition.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
  For taking enlarged pictures of very close objects such  
as the veins of leaves or specimens of tiny insects in  
Digital Microscope mode (p.99).  
  For creating an image like an ink rubbing using the Ink  
Rubbing Filter (p.197).  
Easy-to-Navigate Capture and Playback Functions!  
The user-friendly design of the  
camera enables easy operation  
X
with only a few buttons. Simply by  
choosing the appropriate icon,  
X
XXXXXXX  
XXXXXXX  
XXXXXXX  
XX  
XXXXXXX  
XXXXXXX  
XX  
you can select the shooting mode  
(p.79) and choose the optimal  
settings for the situation, or the  
playback mode (p.168) and enjoy  
the various playback and editing  
functions. A guide on the display  
lets you check the functions  
available in each mode and how  
to use them.  
  A shooting mode guide is displayed in the Capture Mode  
Palette and a playback mode guide in the Playback Mode  
 
Use the Green Mode to take pictures easily using standard  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Perfect for Portrait Shots!  
This camera comes with a “Face Detection” function that spots the faces  
in your shot and automatically adjusts the focus and exposure for the  
faces. It can recognize up to 32 people per shot (*1), so it will help you  
take perfect group shots too. It automatically releases the shutter when  
people are smiling, and if anyone blinks, it tells you that. It also tells you  
where faces are detected on the screen (*2), so you can take the shot  
again until it is perfect. It also has a feature that lets you enlarge each  
person’s face in sequence during playback so you can quickly check  
their facial expressions.  
*1 Up to 31 face detection frames are displayed on the monitor.  
*2 The camera can tell the position of up to 2 detected faces.  
  Face Detection function (p.80).  
  Modes for taking stunning pictures of people (p.92).  
  Close-ups of people’s faces for easy checking during  
playback (p.174).  
  Self-portrait Assist function tells you the face position  
on the screen (p.83).  
Advanced Movie Recording Functions!  
This camera includes Movie SR to reduce camera shake during movie  
recording (p.153). It also supports 1280×720 HDTV so you can view  
your recordings as stunning wide-screen movies.  
  Use the camera to shoot fun-filled movies of your  
children or pets as a visual diary of their development  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Multitude of Functions inside the Camera for  
Enjoying Images Without a Computer!  
This camera has a variety of  
functions to let you enjoy playing  
back and editing images without  
having to connect the camera to  
your computer and transfer the  
images first. The camera is all  
you need to take and edit still  
pictures and movies (p.188).  
  Resize (p.188), Cropping (p.189) and Red-eye  
Compensation (p.203) can be used, while the image is  
displayed in the playback mode.  
  You can divide a movie in two or select a frame from a  
movie to save it as a still picture (p.212).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the Contents of the Package  
Camera  
Optio WG-1 GPS/  
Optio WG-1  
Strap  
O-ST104 (*)  
Carabiner strap  
O-ST117 (WG-1 GPS) (*)  
O-ST118 (WG-1) (*)  
Software (CD-ROM)  
S-SW117  
USB cable  
I-USB7 (*)  
AV cable  
I-AVC7 (*)  
Rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery D-LI92 (*)  
Battery charger  
D-BC92 (*)  
AC plug cord (*)  
Utilities Guide for GPS  
Operating Manual  
(this manual)  
Before using GPS .......................................2  
Using the GPS .............................................4  
Quick Guide  
This manual describes how to use the Optio WG-1 GPS camera’s GPS function  
and precautions when using it. Please read this manual before using the GPS  
function with this camera.  
53209  
H01-201102  
Printed in Vietnam  
Macro stand  
O-MS1  
Utilities Guide for GPS  
(Optio WG-1 GPS only)  
Items marked with an asterisk (*) are also available as optional accessories.  
The battery charger and AC plug cord are only sold as a set (battery charger kit  
K-BC92).  
For other optional accessories, refer to “Optional Accessories” (p.297).  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Names of Parts  
Front  
Power switch/Power lamp (green)  
Lens (with guard glass)  
Shutter  
release button  
Flash  
Speaker/  
Microphone  
Remote control receiver  
Self timer lamp/  
Focus assist  
Macro light  
Back  
Terminal cover  
lock lever  
Display  
Terminal cover  
Tripod socket  
Battery/card cover  
lock lever  
Battery/card cover  
PC/AV terminal HDMI terminal  
Battery lock lever  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Names of Operating Parts  
Power switch  
Shutter release button  
w/x/f/y button  
Q button  
Ibutton  
Four-way controller  
4/W button  
Green/i button  
3 button  
explanation of the function of each button.  
Macro stand  
Attaching the supplied macro stand (O-MS1) reduces camera shake during  
shooting in Digital Microscope mode (p.99). Insert two clips above and below the  
macro lights part. When attaching and detaching the macro stand, do not hold  
the clip part.  
* When using the macro stand, the camera may not be able to focus if the  
objects have asperities.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Monitor Indications  
Display in A Mode  
The display changes in the following sequence each time you press the  
4/W button: “Normal Display”, “Histogram + Info”, “No Info”,  
“LCD Off”.  
• All the camera buttons function as normal even when the LCD is off.  
Press the shutter release button to take pictures as normal.  
Y appears if you press the shutter release button halfway when  
camera shake is likely to occur. To prevent the camera from shaking,  
use a tripod, a remote controller (optional) and/or the self-timer  
• You cannot turn off the LCD in N (Frame Composite), e (Pet) and  
F (Digital Panorama) mode.  
• You cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4/  
W button in 9 (Green) mode or X(Digital Wide) mode.  
• In  
(Digital Microscope) mode, the 4/W button only  
switches between the Normal display and the No Info display.  
Normal Display  
Histogram + Info  
OK  
14  
38  
AWB  
ISO 200  
38  
OK  
OK  
OK  
LCD Off  
No Info  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Normal Display in Still Picture Capture Mode  
20  
11 12 13 14 15  
GPS  
1
P
2
3
DATE  
16  
17  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
+1.0  
1/250  
F3.5  
38  
02/02/'11 14:25  
18 19  
Shooting mode (p.78)  
Battery level indicator (p.42)  
Face Detection icon (p.81)  
Date Imprint setting (p.145)  
EV Compensation (p.133)  
Shutter speed  
Drive mode (p.103 - p.110)  
Focus mode (p.119)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
12  
13  
14  
Eye-Fi communication status  
Digital Zoom/Intelligent Zoom  
15  
Aperture  
Date and time (p.55)  
D-Range Setting (p.134)  
7
8
9
10  
11  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Pixel Track SR icon (p.135)  
Memory status (p.49)  
Remaining image storage capacity  
Flash mode (p.117)  
Positioning status  
(Optio WG-1 GPS only)  
* 6 and 7 are only displayed when the shutter release button is pressed  
half-way.  
* For 8, M is displayed when Pixel Track SR is set to O (On) on the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu. f is displayed when the shutter release  
button is pressed halfway if Pixel Track SR is set to P (Off) and there  
is a danger of camera shake.  
* For 13, when the focus mode is set to = and the Auto Macro function  
is activated, the q appears on the display (p.119).  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* 14 changes as follows depending on the [Eye-Fi] setting in [W Setting]  
menu.  
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or  
searching for the access point when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).  
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating  
when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).  
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).  
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date.  
* 17 disappears two seconds after the camera is turned on.  
* 19 depends on the [D-Range Setting] setting in the [A Rec. Mode]  
menu.  
P
Q
O
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O  
When [Shadow Correction] is set to O  
When [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both  
set to O  
If [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to  
P (Off), nothing appears in 19.  
* 20 changes as follows depending on [GPS] setting in [WSetting] menu.  
GPS  
[GPS Setting] is set to O (On) in [GPS], and the GPS data is  
received.  
GPS  
[GPS Setting] is set to O (On) in [GPS], but GPS data is not  
received.  
GPS Error (*)  
GPS  
!
(*) To recover from an error, turn off the camera, remove and  
GPS  
!
then re-insert the battery and turn on the camera again. If  
is still displayed, the built-in GPS unit may be malfunctioning.  
Contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center.  
No GPS status icon is displayed on the screen when [GPS Setting] is  
set to P (Off).  
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Histogram + Info/No Info Display in Still Picture Capture Mode  
A1 to A21 and B3 appear when “Histogram + Info” is selected. Only B3  
appears when “No Info” is selected.  
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13  
A22  
GPS  
A1  
P
A2  
A3  
A4  
DATE  
B3  
A5  
B1  
B2  
A6  
A7  
A8  
+1.0  
1/250  
F3.5  
A14  
A15  
14M  
38  
AWB  
ISO  
200  
A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21  
Shooting mode (p.78)  
Sensitivity (p.131)  
World time setting  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
Battery level indicator (p.42)  
Face Detection icon (p.81)  
Date Imprint setting (p.145)  
EV Compensation (p.133)  
Pixel Track SR icon (p.135)  
Memory status (p.49)  
D-Range Setting (p.134)  
Recorded pixels (p.125)  
Quality Level (p.127)  
White Balance (p.128)  
AE Metering (p.130)  
Remaining image storage capacity  
Flash mode (p.117)  
Positioning status  
A9  
(Optio WG-1 GPS only)  
Eye-Fi communication status (p.247)  
Digital Zoom/Intelligent Zoom icon  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Focus frame (p.74)  
B1  
B2  
B3  
* For A6, M is displayed when Pixel Track SR is set to O (On) on the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu. f is displayed when the shutter release  
button is pressed halfway if Pixel Track SR is set to P (Off) and there  
is a danger of camera shake.  
* On the No Info display, A6 is displayed for two seconds after turning  
on the camera, setting the Pixel Track SR to ON, or turning the camera  
to capture mode.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* A12 changes as follows depending on the [Eye-Fi] setting in  
[W Setting] menu.  
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is communicating or  
searching for the access point when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).  
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not communicating  
when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).  
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. [Eye-Fi] is set to P (off).  
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out of date.  
* A17 depends on the [D-Range Setting] setting in the [A Rec. Mode]  
menu.  
P
Q
O
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O  
When [Shadow Correction] is set to O  
When [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both  
set to O  
If [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] are both set to  
P (Off), nothing appears in A17.  
* A22 changes as follows depending on [GPS] setting in [WSetting] menu.  
GPS  
[GPS Setting] is set to O (On) in [GPS], and the GPS data is  
received.  
GPS  
[GPS Setting] is set to O (On) in [GPS], but GPS data is not  
received.  
GPS Error (*)  
GPS  
!
(*) To recover from an error, turn off the camera, remove and  
GPS  
!
then re-insert the battery and turn on the camera again. If  
is still displayed, the built-in GPS unit may be malfunctioning.  
Contact your nearest PENTAX Service Center.  
No GPS status icon is displayed on the screen when [GPS Setting] is  
set to P (Off).  
* B1 and B2 are only displayed when the shutter release button is  
pressed half-way.  
* When the shooting mode is b (Auto Picture) and if you press the  
shutter release button halfway, the automatically selected shooting  
mode appears in A1 even when “No Info” is selected (p.84).  
* Some indications may not appear depending on the shooting mode.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* When there is an area on the screen that is overexposed it appears  
white, the indicated area blinks red as a warning. Similarly, when there  
is an area that is underexposed it appears black, the indicated area  
blinks yellow as a warning.  
Display in Q Mode  
The display shows the shooting information of the image in the playback  
mode. The display changes in the following sequence each time you  
press the 4/W button:  
• The display cannot be changed by pressing the 4/W button  
while playing back a voice memo/movie or pausing playback.  
• Only the Optio WG-1 GPS can display GPS information.  
If you are using the Optio WG-1, the display changes to the normal  
display by pressing the 4 button at no info display.  
Normal Display  
Histogram + Info  
-
-
100 0038  
100 0038  
OK  
1/250  
F3.5  
4  
M
Edit  
Edit  
AWB  
ISO 200  
OK  
OK  
100-0038  
02/02/'11 14: 25: 00  
GPS  
N
35 45' 52"  
Edit  
W139 41' 29"  
Edit  
OK  
GPS information display  
No Info  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Histogram + Info Display in Playback Mode  
(All of the display items are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)  
The display shows information such as the shooting conditions. A1 to  
A11 also appear when “Normal Display” is selected. B1 to B8 appear  
only when “Histogram + Info” is selected.  
A1  
-
100 0038  
A7  
A2  
A3  
A8  
A9  
A4  
A5  
B1  
B2  
A10  
A11  
1/250  
F3.5  
A6  
B3  
B4  
14MM  
Edit  
AWB  
ISO  
200  
B5 B6 B7  
B8  
Face Detection icon (p.80)  
Playback mode  
Eye-Fi communication status  
(p.247)  
A1  
A2  
A10  
Q : Still Picture (p.162)  
K : Movie (p.163)  
L : Sound (p.224)  
Battery level indicator (p.42)  
Voice memo icon (p.227)  
Four-way controller guide  
File number  
Folder number (p.242)  
Memory status (p.49)  
Volume icon  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Sensitivity (p.131)  
Recorded pixels (p.125)  
Quality Level (p.127)  
White Balance (p.128)  
AE Metering (p.130)  
A11  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
A9  
* A1 appears only if the Face Detection function worked when the image  
was shot.  
* In “Normal Display”, A3 disappears if no operation is performed for two  
seconds.  
* A6 appears even when “No Info” is selected, but disappears if no  
operation is performed for two seconds. When no operation is  
performed for two seconds in “Normal Display” or “Histogram + Info”,  
only “Edit” disappears.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
* A11 appears only when the volume is being adjusted during playback  
* When “Normal Display” is selected, the current date and time appears  
for two seconds in the B4 to B8 positions.  
* When there is an area on the screen that is overexposed it appears  
white, the indicated area blinks red. Similarly, when there is an area  
that is underexposed it appears black, the indicated area blinks yellow.  
GPS Information Display in Playback Mode (displayed only on the  
Optio WG-1 GPS)  
1
-
100 0038  
7
2
3
8
9
4
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
02/02/'11 14: 25:: 00  
GPS  
6
N
W
35  
q
45' 52"  
Edit  
139  
q
41' 29"  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Face Detection icon  
Playback mode  
8
9
Folder number  
Memory status  
Battery level indicator  
Protect icon  
10 Eye-Fi communication status  
11 Volume icon  
Voice memo icon  
12 Positioning time  
Four-way controller guide  
File number  
13 Positioning latitude  
14 Positioning longitude  
* For 12, the date and time received from GPS are displayed. (Not  
camera’s inner clock time)  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guide Display  
A guide for each available button operation appears as follows on the  
display during operation.  
2
3
Four-way controller (2)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
3 button  
Zoom button  
4/W button  
Shutter release button  
Green/i button  
Ibutton  
OK  
4
SHUTTER  
X, i  
I, J  
5
MENU  
Histogram  
A histogram shows the  
brightness distribution of an  
image. The horizontal axis  
represents brightness (dark at  
the left and bright at the right)  
and the vertical axis  
represents the number of  
pixels.  
The shape of the histogram  
before and after shooting tells  
(Dark) Brightness(Bright)  
Dark portions Bright portions  
you whether the brightness and contrast are correct or not, and lets you  
decide if you need to use EV compensation and take the picture again.  
Understanding Brightness  
If the brightness is correct, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is  
underexposed, the peak is on the left side, and if it is overexposed, the  
peak is on the right side.  
Dark image  
Correct image  
Bright image  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
When the image is underexposed, the part to the left is cut off (dark  
portions) and when the image is overexposed, the part to the right is cut  
off (bright portions).  
This camera has a function where overexposed areas are indicated as  
blinking red and underexposed areas as blinking yellow.  
Understanding Contrast  
The graph peaks gradually for images in which contrast is balanced. The  
graph peaks on both sides but sinks in the middle for images with a large  
difference in contrast and low amounts of mid-level brightness.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Getting Started  
Attaching the Strap ...................................36  
Powering the Camera ...............................38  
Initial Settings ...........................................51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attaching the Strap  
Attaching the Strap  
1
Attach the strap (O-ST104) supplied with the camera.  
1
Pass the narrow end of the strap through the strap lug.  
2
Pass the other end of the strap through the loop and  
pull tight.  
Attaching the Carabiner Strap  
Attach the carabiner strap (O-ST117/O-ST118) supplied with the camera.  
1
Pass the narrow end of the strap through the strap lug  
on the camera.  
2
Fix the end of the strap to the stopper.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Protective rubber ring  
The carabiner has rubber rings to prevent damage to the display. These rubber  
rings cushion the impact when the carabiner hits the display.  
Be sure to adjust the position of the rubber rings as shown in the figure below for  
the best results before using the carabiner strap.  
1
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Powering the Camera  
Charging the Battery  
1
Use the supplied battery charger (D-BC92) to charge the supplied  
rechargeable lithium-ion battery (D-LI92) before using it in the camera  
for the first time or after a long period of non-use, or when the  
[Battery depleted] message appears.  
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible cord,  
rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6 ft (1.8 m)”  
Charging indicator  
While charging: Lights  
Charging finished: Turns off  
3
2
To power outlet  
AC plug cord  
Battery  
1
Battery charger  
1
2
3
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.  
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.  
Place the battery in the battery charger so that the  
PENTAX logo is facing up.  
The charging indicator turns on while charging.  
When charging is finished, the charging indicator turns off.  
4
Remove the battery from the battery charger when  
charging is finished.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Do not charge batteries other than the rechargeable lithium ion D-LI92  
battery using the supplied D-BC92 battery charger. Doing otherwise  
may cause damage or overheating.  
• The battery has reached the end of its service life when it starts to run  
down soon after being charged. Replace it with a new battery.  
• If the battery is inserted correctly but the charging indicator fails to  
light, the battery may be faulty. Replace it with a new battery.  
1
The time required to fully charge the battery is about 120 minutes (max.).  
(The charging time may vary depending on the ambient temperature and  
charging conditions.) The appropriate ambient temperature for charging  
the battery is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).  
Installing the Battery  
Use the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92 that is provided with the  
camera. Charge the battery before using it in the camera for the first  
time.  
Battery lock lever  
Battery/card cover  
lock lever  
Battery/card  
cover  
Battery  
1
Open the battery/card cover.  
Press the battery/card cover lock lever in the direction shown 1, slide  
the cover towards 2 and open it towards 3.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Using the side of the battery to press the battery lock  
lever in the direction of 4, insert the battery with the  
PENTAX logo pointing toward the lens.  
1
Push the battery in until it is locked in place.  
Make sure that the battery is inserted with the PENTAX logo pointing  
toward the lens. If the battery is incorrectly oriented, malfunction may  
result.  
Close the battery/card cover.  
While lightly pressing the battery/card cover in the opposite direction  
indicated by 2, slide the cover. The cover clicks to confirm that it is  
securely closed.  
Removing the Battery  
1
Open the battery/card cover.  
2
Press the battery lock lever towards 4.  
The battery will be ejected. Take care not to drop the battery when  
removing it.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open  
and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the  
packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.  
• If the battery/card cover is not locked securely when you close it,  
water, sand, or dirt may get into the camera.  
1
• This camera uses a rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92. Use of  
any other type of battery may damage the camera and cause  
malfunction.  
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is incorrectly oriented,  
malfunction may result.  
• Do not remove the battery while the camera is turned on.  
• When storing the battery for more than 6 months, charge the battery  
for 30 minutes using the battery charger and store the battery  
separately.  
Be sure to recharge the battery every 6 to 12 months. Storing the  
battery below room temperature is ideal. Avoid storing it in high  
temperatures.  
• The date and time may be returned to the default setting if the camera  
is left without the battery for a long time.  
• Be careful as the camera or the battery may become hot when the  
camera is used continuously for a long period of time.  
• Allow the camera to dry completely before changing the battery. Avoid  
changing the battery where the camera is likely to get wet or dirty, and  
make sure that your hands are dry.  
• Battery performance may deteriorate as temperature decreases.  
When using the camera in cold regions, we recommend carrying a  
spare battery in your pocket to keep it warm. Battery performance will  
return to normal in normal temperatures.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Image Storage Capacity, Movie Recording Time, Sound  
Recording Time, and Playback Time  
(at 23°C or 73.4°F with the display on and the battery fully charged)  
Image Storage  
1
*1  
Capacity  
(flash used for 50% of  
shots)  
Movie Recording Sound Recording  
*2  
Playback Time  
*2  
*2  
Time  
Time  
Approx. 260 pictures  
Approx. 120 min. Approx. 350 min. Approx. 280 min.  
*1 Recording capacity shows approximate number of shots recorded  
during CIPA-compliant testing (with display on, flash used for 50% of  
the shots, and 23°C or 73.4°F). Actual performance may vary  
according to operating conditions.  
*2 According to the results of in-house testing.  
• In general, battery performance may temporarily deteriorate as the  
temperature decreases.  
• Be sure to take a spare battery with you when traveling abroad or to a  
cold region, or if you intend to take a lot of pictures.  
• Battery Level Indicator  
You can check the battery level by the indicator on the display.  
Screen Display  
(green)  
Battery Status  
Adequate power remains.  
(green)  
Battery is running low.  
(yellow)  
Battery is running very low.  
(red)  
Battery is exhausted.  
[Battery depleted]  
The camera will turn off after this message appears.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the AC Adapter  
Use of the optional AC adapter kit (K-AC117) is recommended if you  
intend to use the camera for a long time or connect it to a computer.  
1
1
6
3
5
4
DC terminal  
DC coupler  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off and open the  
battery/card cover.  
2
Remove the Battery.  
Refer to p.39 - p.40 on how to open the battery/card cover and remove  
the battery.  
3
Insert the DC coupler.  
Using the side of the DC coupler to press the battery lock lever, insert  
the DC coupler. Confirm that the DC coupler is locked in place.  
The battery/card cover will not close while the DC coupler is inserted.  
Leave the cover open when using the AC adapter and do not attempt  
to close it.  
4
Connect the DC terminal of the AC adapter to the DC  
terminal of the DC coupler.  
5
6
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.  
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Make sure that the camera is turned off before connecting or  
disconnecting the AC adapter.  
• Make sure that the AC plug cord and the DC terminal connecting the  
AC adapter to the camera are inserted securely. Data may be lost if  
either becomes disconnected while data is being recorded on the SD  
Memory Card or the built-in memory.  
1
• Use the AC adapter with due care to avoid fire or electric shock.  
before using the AC adapter.  
• Be sure to read the operation manual accompanying the AC adapter  
kit K-AC117 before using the adapter.  
• When connecting the AC adapter, you cannot set the camera upright  
on the table because the cord from the DC coupler comes out of the  
bottom of the camera.  
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open  
and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the  
packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the SD Memory Card  
This camera uses SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards or SDXC  
Memory Cards. (These cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards  
hereafter.) Captured images and sound files are saved on the SD  
Memory Card if a card is inserted in the camera. They are saved in the  
built-in memory if a card is not inserted (p.49).  
1
• Be sure to use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory  
Card that is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital  
instructions on formatting.  
• Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing  
the SD Memory Card.  
• Allow the camera to dry completely before changing the SD Memory  
Card. Avoid changing the card where the camera is likely to get wet or  
dirty, and make sure that your hands are dry.  
• Do not use excessive force when sliding the battery/card cover open  
and closed because the waterproof packing may peel off. If the  
packing is not in the correct position, the camera will not be waterproof.  
• The still picture storage capacity varies depending on the capacity of  
the SD Memory Card and the selected number of recorded pixels and  
The power lamp blinks while the SD Memory Card is being accessed  
(data is being recorded or read).  
Backing Up Data  
The camera may not be able to access data in the built-in memory in the case  
of a malfunction. Use a computer or other device to back up important data in  
another location.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
SDMemoryCard  
socket  
Battery/card cover  
SD Memory Card  
1
Open the battery/card cover.  
Press the battery/card cover lock lever in the direction shown 1, slide  
the cover towards 2 and open it towards 3.  
2
Insert the SD Memory Card into the SD Memory Card  
socket so that the label is facing toward the front of the  
camera (the side with the lens).  
Push the card in all the way. Images and sound may not be recorded  
correctly if the card is not inserted all the way.  
3
Close the battery/card cover.  
While lightly pressing the battery/card cover in the opposite direction  
indicated by 2, slide the cover. The cover clicks to confirm that it is  
securely closed.  
To Remove the SD Memory Card  
1
Open the battery/card cover.  
2
Push the card into the SD Memory Card socket to eject  
it.  
Pull the card out.  
If the battery/card cover is not locked securely when you close it, water,  
sand, or dirt may get into the camera.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions When Using an SD Memory Card  
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a  
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to  
LOCK prevents new data from being  
recorded on the card, the stored data from  
1
Write-protect  
switch  
being deleted, and the card from being  
formatted by the camera or a computer.  
r appears on the display when the card is  
write-protected.  
• Care should be taken when removing the SD Memory Card immediately after  
using the camera, as the card may be hot.  
• Keep the battery/card cover closed and do not remove the SD Memory Card  
or turn the camera off while images are being played back or saved to the  
card, or the camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable, as this  
may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.  
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away  
from water and store away from high temperature.  
Never remove the SD Memory Card while it is being formatted. This may  
damage the card and make it unusable.  
• The data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following  
circumstances. We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted. This  
includes the following:  
(1) When the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.  
(2) When the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical  
interference.  
(3) When the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.  
(4) When the SD Memory Card is ejected or the battery is removed while the  
data on the card is being recorded or accessed.  
• If it is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable.  
Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.  
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or  
electrical interference.  
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or where it may be exposed  
to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.  
• When using an SD Memory Card with a slow recording speed, recording may  
stop while you are taking movies even when there is adequate space in the  
memory, or shooting and playback may take a long time.  
• Be sure to format SD Memory Cards that are unused or have been used on  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Number of Images Recordable on an SD Memory  
Card  
The size of a recorded image differs depending on the number of  
recorded pixels of the images. This affects the number of images that  
can be saved on an SD Memory Card.  
1
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels for still pictures on the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu.  
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels and frame rate in  
[Movie] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
For an approximate guide to the number of images or the length of  
recorded movies that can be saved on an SD Memory Card, see “Main  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning the Camera On and Off  
Power switch/Power lamp  
1
1
Press the power switch.  
The camera turns on and both the power lamp and display turn on.  
If the [Language/  
] screen or [Date Adjustment] screen appears  
when you turn the camera on, follow the procedure on p.51 to set the  
display language and/or current date and time.  
2
Press the power switch again.  
The camera turns off and both the power lamp and display turn off.  
Checking the SD Memory Card  
The SD Memory Card is checked when  
the camera turns on and the memory  
status is displayed.  
The SD Memory Card is inserted. Images  
and sound files will be saved on the SD  
Memory Card.  
a
38  
The SD Memory Card is not inserted.  
Images and sound files will be saved in the  
Memory status  
+
built-in memory.  
The write-protect switch on the SD Memory  
Card is in the LOCK position (p.47). Images  
and sounds cannot be recorded.  
r
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Starting-up in the Playback Mode  
Use this function when you want to play back images or sound files  
straightaway without taking any pictures.  
1
Power switch  
Q
button  
1
Press the power switch while holding down the Q  
button.  
The display turns on and the camera starts up in playback mode.  
To switch from Playback Mode to A mode, press the Q button or press  
the shutter release button halfway.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Settings  
The [Language/  
] screen appears when the camera is turned on for  
the first time. Perform the operations in “Setting the Display Language”  
below to set the language, and in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.55) to  
set the current date and time.  
1
The language, date, and time can be changed later. Refer to the pages below  
for instructions.  
• To change the language, follow the steps in “Changing the Display Language”  
(1p.241).  
• To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and  
Setting the Display Language  
3 button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose the  
display language.  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in  
the selected language. If the desired  
settings for [Hometown] and [DST]  
(Daylight Saving Time) appear,  
proceed to Step 3.  
DST” (p.54) if the desired settings do  
not appear.  
Initial Setting  
English  
1
Hometown  
New York  
DST  
OFF  
Settings complete  
MENU  
Cancel  
Daylight saving time  
3
4
Press the four-way controller  
(3) twice to select [Settings  
complete].  
Initial Setting  
English  
Hometown  
New York  
DST  
OFF  
Settings complete  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
Press the 4 button.  
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears. Set the date and time by  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you accidentally select the wrong language and go to the next procedure,  
perform the following operation to set the language back.  
 When the Wrong Language Has Been Inadvertently Selected  
1
1
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the  
language and press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the selected language.  
 
When the Screen After Step 2 Appears in the Wrong Language  
1
Press the 3 button.  
This exits the settings screen and returns the camera to capture  
mode.  
2
Press the 3 button.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (32) to select [Language/  
].  
5
6
7
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Language/  
] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the  
language.  
Press the 4 button.  
The [W Setting] menu appears in the selected language.  
The language is now switched to your desired language. To reset [Hometown],  
[Date] and [Time], refer to the pages below for instructions.  
• To change [Hometown], follow the steps in “Setting the World Time”  
(1p.237).  
• To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Set Hometown and DST  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(3).  
Initial Setting  
1
English  
The frame moves to [W Hometown].  
Hometown  
New York  
DST  
OFF  
Settings complete  
MENU  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [W Hometown] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose a city.  
Hometown  
City  
DST  
New York  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
6
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [DST] (Daylight Saving Time).  
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen reappears.  
9
Press the four-way controller  
(3) to select [Settings  
Initial Setting  
English  
complete].  
Hometown  
DST  
OFF  
New York  
Settings complete  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
10 Press the 4 button.  
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears. Next, set the date and time.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The video output format (NTSC/PAL) is set to the format of the city selected in  
[Hometown] on the [Initial Setting] screen. See the following pages for information  
on the available video output formats and how to change the initial settings.  
• Video output formats available initially: “List of World Time Cities” (1p.296)  
• To change the video out format, follow the steps in “Changing the Video  
1
Setting the Date and Time  
Set the current date and time and the display format.  
1
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to choose the date and  
time display format.  
Choose from [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy]  
or [yy/mm/dd].  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [24h].  
Use the four-way controller  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
(23) to select [24h] (24-hour  
display) or [12h] (12-hour  
display).  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Date  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Date Format].  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Press the four-way controller  
(3).  
The frame moves to [Date].  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Date  
Time  
1
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
7
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to the month.  
8
Use the four-way controller  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
(23) to change the month.  
Change the day and year in the same  
manner.  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Date  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
Next, change the time.  
MENU  
If you selected [12h] in step 4, the  
setting switches between am and pm  
corresponding to the time.  
9
Press the four-way controller  
(3) to select [Settings  
complete].  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Date  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button.  
This confirms the date and time.  
If you press the 4 button in step 10, the camera clock is reset to 00  
seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time  
signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.  
When the [Initial Setting] or [Date Adjustment] screen is displayed, you  
can cancel the setting operation and switch to the capture mode by  
pressing the 3 button. In this case, the [Initial Setting] screen will  
appear next time you turn the camera on.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Language/  
], [Date], [Time], [Hometown] and [DST] can be changed. Refer  
to the pages below for instructions.  
• To change the language, follow the steps in “Changing the Display Language”  
(1p.241).  
• To change the date and time, follow the steps in “Changing the Date and  
1
• To change the city or turn DST on and off, follow the steps in “Setting the  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Common Operations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding the Button Functions  
A Mode  
1
2
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
1
2
Power switch  
Turns the camera on and off (p.49).  
Shutter release button  
Focuses the camera on the subject when pressed halfway in Still  
Picture Capture Mode (except when the focus mode is set to 3, s,  
Takes a still picture when pressed down fully (p.75).  
Pressing down fully starts and stops movie recording in C (Movie) and  
(Underwater Movie) modes (p.148, p.151).  
Pressing down fully starts and stops sound file recording in O (Voice  
3
4
5
w/xbutton  
Changes the captured area (p.88).  
Q button  
Switches to the Q mode (p.64).  
3 button  
Displays the [A Rec. Mode] menu (p.65).  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
6 Ibutton  
Switches the Face Detection function (p.80). The Face Detection  
function is switched as follows each time the Ibutton is pressed:  
Smile Capture ´ Self-portrait Assist ´ Self-portrait Assist + Smile  
Capture ´ Face Detection Off ´ Face Detection On  
Selects or registers a pet in e (Pet) mode.  
7
Four-way controller  
2
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
: Changes the drive mode (p.103 - p.110).  
: Displays the Capture Mode Palette (p.79).  
: Changes the flash mode (p.117).  
: Changes the focus mode (p.119).  
(23) : Adjusts the focus when the focus mode is set to \ (p.120).  
8
9
4/W button  
Changes the information on the display (p.25).  
Green button  
Switches to the 9 (Green) mode (p.86).  
Calls up the assigned function (p.139).  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Q Mode  
1
2
3
2
4
6
7
8
9
5
1
2
3
Power switch  
Turns the camera on and off (p.49).  
Shutter release button  
Switches to A mode (p.64).  
f/y button  
In single-image display, pressing f switches to 6-image display.  
Pressing f again switches to 12-image display (p.164). Press y to  
return to the previous display.  
In single-image display, pressing y enlarges the image. Press f to  
return to the previous display (p.173).  
In 12-image display press  
f
to change to folder or calendar display (p.165).  
In folder/calendar display, press y to change to 12-image display  
Adjusts the volume during playback of movies, sound files or voice  
4
5
Q button  
Switches to A mode (p.64).  
3 button  
Displays the [W Setting] menu during single-image display (p.65).  
Returns to single-image display during Playback Mode Palette display (p.167).  
Returns zoom, 6- or 12-image display to single-image display.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Changes to 12-image display of the selected folder during folder display (p.166).  
Changes to 12-image display of the selected date during calendar  
6 Ibutton  
Zooms up on the subjects’ faces in the order in which they were  
recognized during shooting (Face close-up playback) (p.174).  
7
Four-way controller  
2
(2)  
: Plays back and pauses a movie or sound file (p.163,  
(3)  
: Displays the Playback Mode Palette (p.168).  
Stops a movie or sound file during playback (p.163,  
(45)  
: Displays the previous or next image and sound file  
during single-image display (p.162).  
Fast-forwards, fast-reverses, frame forwards, frame  
reverses, reverses a movie and makes a movie play  
forwards during playback (p.163).  
Fast forwards, reverses, and moves to the next index in  
sound file playback (p.224).  
(2345) : Moves the display area during zoom display (p.173).  
Selects an image in 6- or 12-image display, a folder in folder  
display, and a date in calendar display (p.164, p.165, p.166).  
Moves the image when using the Frame Composite  
Adjusts the position of a frame or an image when you are  
using the Original Frame function (p.209).  
8
9
4/W button  
Changes the information on the display (p.30).  
Returns zoom, 6- or 12-image display to single-image display (p.165, p.173).  
Changes to 12-image display of the selected folder during folder  
Changes to single-image display of the selected date during calendar  
Green/i button  
Switches from single-image display to the Delete screen (p.176).  
Switches from 6- or 12-image display to the Select & Delete screen (p.178).  
Switches from folder display to the calendar display screen (p.165).  
Switches from calendar display to the folder display screen (p.165).  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Switching Between A Mode and Q Mode  
In this manual, the capture mode, such as for taking still pictures, is  
referred to as “A mode” (the capture mode). The playback mode, such  
as for displaying captured images on the monitor, is referred to as “Q  
mode” (the playback mode). In Q mode, you can perform simple editing  
operations on the images that are played back.  
Follow the procedure below to switch between A mode and Q mode.  
2
To Switch from A Mode to Q Mode  
1
Press the Q button.  
The camera switches to Q mode.  
To Switch from Q Mode to A Mode  
Press the button or the shutter release button halfway.  
1
Q
The camera switches to A mode.  
Displaying data stored in the built-in memory  
When an SD Memory Card is inserted in the camera, images, movies,  
and sounds on the SD Memory Card are displayed. If you want to  
display images, movies, and sounds stored in built-in memory, turn the  
camera off and remove the SD Memory Card.  
Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing  
the SD Memory Card.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Camera Functions  
To change the camera settings, press the 3 button to display the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu or [W Setting] menu. Functions for playing back  
and editing images and sound files are displayed from the Playback  
Mode Palette.  
2
Operating the Menus  
Press the 3 button in A mode to display the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
Press the 3 button in Q mode to display the [W Setting] menu.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to switch between [A Rec. Mode]  
menu and [W Setting] menu.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
During recording  
During playback  
-
100 0038  
P
38  
Edit  
2
MENU  
MENU  
Rec. Mode  
1/4  
Setting  
Sound  
1/4  
Image Tone  
Bright  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
14M  
Date Adjustment  
Alarm  
World Time  
Text Size  
02/02/2011  
AWB  
Standard  
English  
AE Metering  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
Rec. Mode  
1/4  
Setting  
1/4  
Image Tone  
Bright  
Sound  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
14  
M
Date Adjustment  
Alarm  
World Time  
Text Size  
02/02/2011  
AWB  
Standard  
English  
AE Metering  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
SHUTTER  
MENU  
Press halfway  
-
100 0038  
P
38  
Edit  
The setting is complete  
and the camera returns  
to A mode.  
The setting is complete  
and the camera returns  
to Q mode.  
Available button operations appear on the display during menu  
operation.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
e.g.: To set the [Quality Level] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(3).  
The frame moves to [Image Tone].  
Rec. Mode  
1/4  
Image Tone  
Bright  
14  
M
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
ڎ
ڎ
 
AWB  
2
AE Metering  
MENU  
Exit  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (3) twice.  
The frame moves to [Quality Level].  
Press the four-way controller  
Recordable Image No.  
12  
(5).  
Image Tone  
Bright  
14  
M
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
A pull-down menu appears with the  
items that can be selected.  
The pull-down menu displays only  
those items that can be selected with  
the current camera settings.  
ڎ
ڎڎ
 
ڎ
ڎ
 
ڎ
AE Metering  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the setting.  
The quality level changes each time the four-way controller (23) is  
pressed.  
Press the 4 button or the four-way controller (4).  
The setting is saved and then the camera is ready for setting other  
functions.  
To exit the settings, press the 3 button.  
To use another operation, refer to the alternate step 6 options on the next  
page.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Save the Setting and Start Taking Pictures  
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
When the shutter release button is pressed fully, the picture is taken.  
When the [W Setting] menu is displayed from Q mode, you can switch  
to A mode by pressing the Q button.  
2
To Save the Setting and Start Playback of Images  
6
Press the Q button.  
When the [A Rec. Mode] menu is displayed from A mode, the setting  
is saved and the camera returns to playback status.  
To Cancel the Changes and Continue with Menu Operations  
6
Press the 3 button.  
The changes are canceled and the screen returns to step 3.  
The 3 button function differs depending on the screen. Refer to the  
guide indications.  
Exit  
Exits the menu and returns to the original screen.  
MENU  
Returns to the previous screen with the current  
setting.  
MENU  
Cancel Cancels the current selection, exits the menu and  
returns to the previous screen.  
MENU  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu List  
This displays the items that can be set with the menus and provides  
descriptions of each item. See the list of default settings in the Appendix  
“Default Settings” (p.291) to decide whether you want the settings saved  
when the camera is turned off and whether you want the settings  
returned to the defaults when the camera is reset.  
2
[A Rec. Mode] Menu  
This menu shows the functions related to taking still pictures and  
recording movies.  
Item  
Image Tone  
Description  
For setting the tone of images  
Page  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
For choosing the number of recorded pixels of still pictures p.125  
For setting the quality level of still pictures  
For adjusting the color balance according to the  
lighting conditions  
White Balance  
When  
(Standard), (Macro), or  
(1cm  
=
q
Focusing  
Area  
AF  
Macro) is selected as the focus mode, you can  
change the autofocus area (Focusing Area)  
Setting Auto Macro For choosing whether or not to use the auto macro function p.122  
For setting whether or not to use the focus assist  
light  
Focus  
Assist  
For choosing the area of the screen that is metered  
to determine the exposure  
For setting the sensitivity  
For setting the adjustment range when sensitivity is  
set to AUTO  
For adjusting the overall brightness of the picture  
AE Metering  
Sensitivity  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
Recorded  
Pixels  
For choosing the number of recorded pixels and the  
frame rate for movies  
For choosing whether or not to use the movie shake  
reduction function  
For recording multiple still pictures taken at a set  
interval as a movie file  
Movie Movie SR  
Interval  
Shoot  
Highlight  
For setting whether to perform bright portion  
Correction compensation  
For setting whether to perform dark portion  
Correction compensation  
D-Range  
Setting  
Shadow  
For choosing whether to compensate for camera  
shake while taking still pictures  
For setting the interval, number of pictures, and start  
time for taking pictures  
Pixel Track SR  
Interval Shoot  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Item  
Description  
Page  
For choosing whether to use the Blink Detection  
function with the Face Detection function  
Blink Detection  
For choosing whether or not to use the digital zoom  
function  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
For choosing whether to display Instant Review  
For choosing whether to save the set values of the  
shooting function or return to the defaults when the  
camera is turned off  
For assigning a function to the Green button in A  
mode  
For choosing sharp or soft outlines  
For setting the color saturation. When [Monochrome] is  
selected, the item changes to [Tone Adjustment]  
For setting the image contrast level  
For choosing whether to imprint the date and/or time  
when taking still pictures  
Memory  
2
Green Button  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
(Tone Adjustment)  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer*  
Macro Light  
For setting whether to perform the IQ enhancer.  
For setting whether or not to turn on the macro light  
for macro photography  
*IQ Enhancer = Image Quality Enhancer  
  [A Rec. Mode] Menu 1  
  [A Rec. Mode] Menu 2  
Rec. Mode  
Rec. Mode  
1/4  
2/4  
Sensitivity  
Image Tone  
Bright  
AUTO  
ISO80-800  
0.0  
14  
M
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
Movie  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
ڎ
ڎ
 
AWB  
AE Metering  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
  [A Rec. Mode] Menu 3  
  [A Rec. Mode] Menu 4  
Rec. Mode  
Rec. Mode  
3/4  
4/4  
Interval Shoot  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Memory  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
Off  
Green Button  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
• Use the 9 (Green) mode to enjoy easy picture-taking using standard  
settings, regardless of the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu (p.86).  
• Assigning frequently used functions to the Green button enables you  
to go straight to the desired function (p.139).  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[W Setting] Menu  
Item  
Description  
Page  
For adjusting the operation volume and playback  
volume, and setting the start-up sound, shutter  
sound, key operation sound, and self-timer sound  
Sound  
Date Adjustment For adjusting the date and time  
Alarm  
For setting the alarm  
World Time  
Text Size  
For setting the hometown and destination  
For setting the text size of the menu  
2
For setting the language in which menus and  
messages appear  
Language/  
For choosing how names are assigned to folders for  
storing images and sound files  
Folder Name  
For setting the method for connecting to a PC (MSC  
or PTP)  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
For setting the output format to the AV equipment  
For setting the HDMI output format when connecting  
to an AV device with an HDMI terminal  
HDMI Out  
For setting whether or not to use Eye-Fi  
communication  
Eye-Fi  
Brightness Level For changing the brightness of the display  
For setting the time until the camera enters power-  
Power Saving  
saving mode  
For setting the time until the camera turns off  
Auto Power Off  
automatically  
For choosing whether to use the Quick Zoom function  
Quick Zoom  
(p.173) when playing back images  
For setting whether to display explanations for  
Guide Display  
Reset  
selected items in Capture Mode Palette and Playback  
Mode Palette displays  
For returning settings other than the date and time,  
language, world time and video out to their defaults  
Delete All  
Pixel Mapping  
Format  
For deleting all the images and sound files at once  
For correcting for defective pixels on the CCD sensor  
For formatting the SD Memory Card/built-in memory  
GPS  
For setting whether to record the GPS data on  
captured images  
Setting  
GPS  
Logging  
(*)  
For setting the interval at which to record GPS logs GPS Guide  
Auto Time For setting whether to correct the clock in the camera  
Synch.  
automatically using the received GPS data  
(*) Optio WG-1 GPS only  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
  [W Setting] Menu 1  
  [W Setting] Menu 2  
Setting  
Sound  
Date Adjustment  
Alarm  
World Time  
Text Size  
Setting  
1/4  
2/4  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Date  
MSC  
01/01/2011  
NTSC  
Auto  
Standard  
English  
Brightness Level  
2
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
  [W Setting] Menu 3  
  [W Setting] Menu 4  
Setting  
4/4  
Setting  
3/4  
5sec.  
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
Pixel Mapping  
Format  
3min.  
GPS  
Delete All  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Taking Pictures  
Taking Still Pictures ..................................74  
Recording Movies ...................................150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Taking Still Pictures  
Taking Pictures  
This camera is equipped with functions and shooting modes that support  
a wide array of scenes and subjects. This section explains shooting  
using the default settings when shipped.  
Power switch  
Shutter release button  
3
w/x button  
1
Press the power switch.  
The camera turns on and is ready to take still pictures. In this manual,  
this is called Still Picture Capture mode.  
2
Confirm the subject and  
shooting information on the  
display.  
The focus frame in the middle of the  
display indicates the zone of  
automatic focusing.  
38  
Focus frame  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
38  
Face detection frame  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
You can change the captured area by pressing the zoom button (p.88).  
Right (x) Enlarges the subject.  
Left (w)  
Widens the area that is captured by the camera.  
3
4
Press the shutter release  
button halfway.  
The camera emits Focus Assist light in  
dark shooting situations.  
The focus frame (or face detection  
frame) on the display turns green  
when the camera focuses on the  
subject at the correct distance.  
1/250  
F4.6  
38  
3
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
The flash discharges automatically depending on the light conditions.  
The image appears on the display temporarily (Instant Review: p.77)  
and is saved to the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory.  
Press the Green button to switch to the 9 (Green) mode and let the  
camera set all the shooting functions automatically (p.86).  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Shutter Release Button  
The shutter release button works in a two-step action as follows.  
Press halfway  
This refers to pressing the shutter release button gently to the first  
position. This locks the focus setting and the exposure. The green focus  
frame lights on the display when the shutter release button is pressed  
halfway and the subject is in focus. If the subject is out of focus, the  
frame turns white.  
Press fully  
3
This refers to pressing the shutter release button all the way down to the  
fully depressed position. This takes a picture.  
Not pressed  
Pressed halfway Pressed fully  
(first position) (second position)  
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to  
prevent camera shake.  
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn  
where the first position and second position are.  
Poor focusing conditions  
The camera may not be able to focus under the following conditions. In these  
cases, lock the focus on an object the same distance away as the subject (by  
pressing and holding the shutter release button halfway), then aim the camera  
at your subject and press the shutter release button fully.  
• Objects that lack contrast such as a blue sky or white wall  
• Dark places or objects, or conditions that prevent light being reflected back  
• Horizontal lines or intricate patterns  
• Fast moving objects  
• When there is an object in the foreground and an object in the background in  
the captured area  
• Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright background)  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Instant Review and Blink Detection  
The image appears on the display temporarily (Instant Review)  
immediately after it is captured. If the camera detects that the subject’s  
eyes are closed while Face Detection (p.80) is activated, the message  
[Closed eyes have been detected] appears for 3 seconds (Blink  
Detection).  
• When the Face Detection function does not work, Blink Detection also  
does not function. Even if the subject’s faces are recognized, Blink  
Detection may not function depending on the condition of the  
recognized faces.  
3
• You can also disable the Blink Detection function (p.138).  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Shooting Mode  
This camera has a variety of shooting modes that let you take pictures  
or record movies and sound in different situations simply by choosing the  
right mode for the particular situation from the Capture Mode Palette.  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose a  
Landscape  
1/2  
shooting mode.  
A guide of the selected shooting mode  
For capturing landscape  
views. Enhances colors  
of sky and foliage  
is displayed in the lower part of the  
display.  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The shooting mode is selected and the  
camera returns to capture mode.  
38  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following 24 modes can be selected with Capture Mode Palette.  
Item  
Description  
Page  
Auto Picture  
Automatically selects the best capture mode  
b
Used for basic shooting. Various functions can  
also be set with this mode  
Program  
R
For night time images. Use of a tripod or other  
support is suggested  
Night Scene  
A
Movie  
For recording movies  
C
Underwater  
For capturing images underwater  
Underwater Movie Use this mode for taking underwater movie  
3
Capture the bigger images of the closer objects  
(fixed to h)  
Digital Microscope  
For capturing landscape views. Enhances colors  
of sky and foliage  
Landscape  
a
b
For images of flowers. The outline of the flower is  
softened  
Flower  
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy  
and bright skin tone  
Portrait  
c
Stitches two pictures together to create a wider  
X
Digital Wide  
image  
Digital SR  
Higher sensitivity reduces blur  
c
For bright images such as sand or snow.  
Accurately meters for bright scenes  
Surf & Snow  
Q
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces a healthy  
and bright skin tone  
Kids  
Pet  
R
e
\
Suitable shooting for moving pets. Available to  
detect registered pets  
For a fast moving subject. Tracks the subject until  
the picture is taken  
Sport  
For capturing fireworks. Use of a tripod or other  
support is suggested  
Fireworks  
S
U
B
Candlelight  
For capturing scenes in candlelight  
Night Scene  
Portrait  
For images of people at night. Use of a tripod or  
other support is advised  
Captures text in an easy to read manner. Text  
contrast can be adjusted  
Text  
B
K
For images of food and prepared dishes.  
Enhances saturation and contrast  
Food  
Stitches images taken with the camera to create  
a panoramic photograph  
Digital Panorama  
F
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Item  
Description  
Page  
For capturing images with a frame. Recorded  
pixels is fixed to h or h  
Frame Composite  
N
For capturing image with fixed 1280×960 pixels  
for reports  
Report  
* Green Mode (p.86) and Voice Recording (p.222) are available in addition to the  
ones noted above.  
• In shooting modes other than R (Program), A (Night Scene),  
C (Movie),  
(Digital Microscope), c (Digital SR), F (Digital  
Panorama), X(Digital Wide), and N (Frame Composite),  
saturation, contrast, sharpness, white balance, etc. are automatically  
set to the optimal settings for the selected mode.  
3
• Some functions may not be available or may not function fully  
depending on the selected shooting mode. For details, refer to  
• You can turn off the shooting mode guide on the Capture Mode Palette  
(p.252).  
Using the Face Detection Function  
When the camera detects a person’s face in  
the image, the Face Detection function  
displays a yellow face detection frame around  
the face on the display screen, sets the focus  
(Face Detection AF) and compensates the  
exposure (Face Detection AE).  
38  
If the subject in the face detection frame  
moves, the frame also moves and  
Face detection frame  
changes size as it tracks the face.  
The Face Detection function can  
When the multiple faces are  
detected  
recognize up to 32 people’s faces. If it  
recognizes multiple faces, the camera  
displays a yellow frame over the main face  
and white frames over the other faces. It  
can display up to a total of 31 frames,  
including both the main and white frames.  
38  
Main frame White frame  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Face Detection AF and AE may not work if the subject is wearing  
sunglasses, has part of their face covered or is not looking toward the  
camera.  
• If the camera cannot detect the subject’s face, the camera focuses  
using the setting currently selected in [Focusing Area].  
• However, the Smile Capture function may not work and an image may  
not be captured, even when turned on, depending on the condition of  
the recognized faces, such as the faces are too small. If this happens,  
press the shutter release button to take a picture.  
• In e (Pet) mode, the Face Detection mode is switched to pet  
detection (only one pet).  
3
To Switch the Face Detection Function  
By default, the Face Detection function is set to Face Detection On. You  
can switch to the Smile Capture function, which automatically releases  
the shutter when your subject smiles. The Face Detection function is  
switched as follows each time the Ibutton is pressed:  
Smile Capture ´ Self-portrait Assist ´ Self-portrait Assist + Smile  
Capture ´ Face Detection Off ´ Face Detection On  
Ibutton  
An icon indicating either Face Detection or Smile Capture appears on  
the display. (The Face Detection Off icon only appears right after the  
Face Detection function is switched to off.)  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Face Detection On  
Smile Capture  
Self-portrait Assist  
P
P
P
P
P
3
Face Detection Off  
Self-portrait Assist  
+ Smile Capture  
• The Face Detection function cannot be set to off in b (Auto Picture),  
B (Night Scene Portrait), c (Portrait), or R(Kids). Any one of Face  
Detection On, Smile Capture, Self-portrait Assist or Self-portrait Assist  
+ Smile Capture is always activated in these modes.  
• When Face Detection Off is selected, selecting 9 (Green), b (Auto  
Picture), B (Night Scene Portrait), C (Movie), c (Portrait), R(Kids),  
or  
(Underwater Movie) modes automatically switches to Face  
Detection On. When switching to another mode from one of these  
modes, the Face Detection setting returns to the previous setting.  
• If you use the Face Detection function when the flash mode is set to  
, (Auto), the flash mode automatically changes to d (Flash On +  
Red-eye).  
• The Self-portrait Assist or the Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture  
cannot be set to on in X(Digital Wide), F (Digital Panorama),  
(Report), e (Pet), C (Movie),  
Microscope).  
• Self-portrait Assist and Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture cannot be  
selected when (Report) mode is selected or the Macro Light is on  
(Underwater Movie), or (Digital  
in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Use the Self-portrait Assist Function  
The macro lights around the lens blink when the camera detects people  
faces in the Self-portrait Assist or Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture  
function. The position of the blinking light indicates where the detected  
face is on the screen.  
When the camera detects a face  
When the camera detects two faces  
Detects a face on  
the right while  
facing the camera.  
Detects two faces,  
one at the center  
and one on the right  
while facing the  
camera.  
3
Detects a face on  
the left while facing  
the camera.  
Detects two faces,  
one at the center  
and one on the left  
while facing the  
camera.  
Detects a face at  
the center while  
facing the camera.  
Detects two faces at  
the center or one on  
the right and one on  
the left while facing  
the camera.  
• The camera can tell the position of up to two detected faces.  
• When the camera detects three or four faces, the lights blink  
depending on the number of the detected faces. When the camera  
detects five or more faces, all lights (five) blink (the lights do not tell the  
position of detected faces).  
• In b (Auto Picture) mode, LED turns off after pressing the shutter  
release button halfway when the camera is in a mode with no face  
detection function.  
• When the Self Portrait Assist function is on, LED does not turn off after  
the set period of Power Saving.  
• LED does not blink when the detected faces are too small.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taking Pictures Automatically (Auto Picture Mode)  
In b (Auto Picture) mode, the camera automatically selects the most  
appropriate mode depending on the situations and subjects.  
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
3
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
b (Auto Picture).  
Press the 4 button.  
Auto Picture mode is selected and the  
camera returns to capture mode.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
38  
appears (p.80). When the camera  
detects a pet’s full face, the shutter is automatically released.  
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The automatically selected capture mode appears on the top left of the display.  
Standard  
Night Scene  
Flower  
Night Scene Portrait  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Sport  
Candlelight  
Blue Sky  
Sunset  
Portrait×Blue Sky  
Portrait×Sunset  
Portrait×Backlight  
Group Photograph  
Text  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
The following restrictions apply in b mode:  
• EV Compensation is unavailable.  
• You cannot turn the Face Detection function off.  
• The [Focusing Area] setting is fixed at J (Multiple).  
• Flower cannot be selected when using Digital Zoom or Intelligent  
Zoom.  
• If Night Scene is selected when the flash mode is , (Auto) or c (Auto  
+ Red-eye), the flash mode automatically changes to a (Flash Off).  
3
• If the  
(Night Scene Portrait) mode is selected when the flash mode  
is , (Auto), the flash mode automatically changes to d (Flash On +  
Red-eye) when the camera detects a face and determines that the  
flash is needed.  
Setting the Functions (Program Mode)  
In R (Program) mode, the shutter speed and the aperture are set  
automatically by the camera during shooting. However, you can select  
other functions such as the flash mode and recorded pixels.  
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
R (Program).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Press the 4 button.  
P
Program mode is selected and the  
camera returns to capture mode.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
appears (p.80).  
388  
4
5
6
Set the functions you want to use.  
how to set the functions.  
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Taking Pictures in the Basic Mode (Green Mode)  
In the 9 (Green) mode, you can enjoy easy picture-taking using  
standard settings, regardless of the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
9 mode settings are as shown below.  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
Focus Mode  
Highlight Correction P (Off)  
, (Auto)  
9 (Standard)  
= (Standard)  
Shadow Correction P (Off)  
Sensitivity  
AUTO (80-800)  
Information Display Standard  
EV Compensation ±0.0  
Pixel Track SR  
Recorded Pixels  
White Balance  
Focusing Area  
Auto Macro  
P (Off)  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Sharpness  
O (On)  
(4288×3216)  
O (On)  
g
O (On)  
F (Auto)  
J (Multiple)  
O (On)  
G (Normal)  
G (Normal)  
G (Normal)  
Off  
Saturation  
Focus Assist  
O (On)  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
L(Multi-segment  
metering)  
AE Metering  
O (On)  
Image Tone  
Quality Level  
Bright  
P (Off)  
D (Better)  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Shutter release  
button  
Green Button  
1
Press the Green button in A  
mode.  
3
The camera switches to 9 mode.  
Press the Green button again to  
return to the status before 9 mode  
was selected.  
38  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection  
frame appears (p.80).  
2
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
• Assign 9 mode to the [Green Button] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu for  
using 9 mode (p.140). (The default setting is 9 mode).  
• In 9 mode, you cannot change the information on the display by  
pressing the 4/W button.  
• Press the 3 button in 9 mode to display the [W Setting] menu.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu cannot be displayed.  
• When the camera is turned off in 9 mode, it turns on in 9 mode next  
time the power switch is pressed.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Zoom  
You can use the zoom to change the captured area.  
w/x button  
3 button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
3
1
Press the w/x button in A  
mode.  
Zoom ratio  
Zoom bar  
w Wide (left)  
33.5  
Widens the area that is  
captured by the camera.  
x Tele (right)  
Enlarges the subject.  
38  
If you continue to press x, the camera  
automatically switches from Optical Zoom to Intelligent Zoom and  
stops at the point where the zoom switches to Digital Zoom.  
Once the button is released and pressed again, the camera switches  
to digital zoom.  
If the Digital Zoom is set to off on the menu, the Optical Zoom and the  
Intelligent Zoom ranges are available for use. The zoom ratio of the  
intelligent zoom changes depending on the number of recorded pixels.  
The zoom bar is displayed as follows.  
Zoom in with some degree of image  
Zoom in with high image quality.  
deterioration.  
Optical zoom range*1  
Intelligent  
Zoom range*2  
*1 You can zoom in to a maximum of 5× optically.  
Digital Zoom  
range  
*2 The Intelligent Zoom range differs depending on the recorded  
pixels. See the following table.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recorded pixels and the maximum zoom ratio  
Intelligent Zoom  
Recorded Pixels  
Digital Zoom  
(The zoom ratio includes the 5× optical zoom.)  
Not Available (5× optical zoom only)  
Approx. 7.0×  
g/i/j  
6/  
f/  
h
Equivalent to  
approx. 33.5×  
Approx. 8.3×  
Approx. 10.5×  
Approx. 11.2×  
h
(*)  
Not Available (5× optical zoom only)  
V
Equivalent to  
approx. 33.5×  
3
Approx. 20.9×  
l
m
Approx. 33.5× (same as Digital Zoom)  
(*) V can only be set for recorded pixels when  
(Report) mode is set.  
• We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake when taking  
pictures at high zoom.  
• Pictures taken in the digital zoom range appear grainier than pictures  
taken in the optical zoom range.  
• Intelligent Zoom is not available under the following conditions:  
When the number of recorded pixels is set to g, i and j  
(5× optical zoom available).  
In 9 (Green), C (Movie), and  
• Intelligent Zoom and Digital Zoom are not available in c (Digital SR)  
and (Report) modes, or when the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400.  
(Underwater movie) mode  
• The image enlarged using Intelligent Zoom may appear rough on the  
display. This does not affect the quality of the recorded image.  
• Intelligent Zoom is available regardless of whether Digital Zoom is  
turned on or off.  
• Digital Zoom is not available in  
(Digital Microscope) mode.  
• Not every zooming function is available in X(Digital Wide) mode.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To Set the Digital Zoom  
The digital zoom is set to O (On) in the default settings. To take pictures  
using only the optical zoom and Intelligent Zoom, set the digital zoom to  
P (Off).  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Digital Zoom].  
3
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
3/4  
(45) to switch between  
O (On) or P (Off).  
Interval Shoot  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Memory  
O(On)  
Uses Digital Zoom  
Green Button  
P (Off)  
Uses only optical zoom  
and Intelligent Zoom  
MENU  
Exit  
The setting is saved.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
Saving the Digital Zoom Function setting 1p.158  
Taking Pictures of Dark Scenes (Night Scene,  
Night Scene Portrait, Digital SR, Fireworks, and  
Candlelight Modes)  
You can choose settings appropriate for taking pictures of dark scenes,  
such as nightscapes.  
For night time images. Use of a tripod or other support  
Night Scene  
A
is suggested  
For images of people at night. Use of a tripod or other  
support is advised  
Night Scene Portrait  
Digital SR  
B
c
S
Higher sensitivity reduces blur  
For capturing fireworks. Use of a tripod or other  
support is suggested  
Fireworks  
Candlelight  
For capturing scenes in candlelight  
U
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
3
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
A (Night Scene), B (Night Scene Portrait), c (Digital  
SR), S(Fireworks), or U(Candlelight).  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.  
When the camera recognizes a person’s face, the Face Detection  
function is activated and the face detection frame appears (p.80).  
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
• The shutter speed tends to be slower when taking pictures of dark  
scenes.  
• To prevent the camera from shaking, set the Pixel Track SR (p.135) or  
use a tripod and/or remote control (optional), the self-timer function  
(p.103).  
• In c (Digital SR) mode, the sensitivity is automatically set to AUTO,  
the [AUTO ISO Range] is set to 80-6400, and the number of recorded  
pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/  
(2592×1464).  
• For S(Fireworks) mode, the sensitivity is fixed at the minimum, the  
focus mode is s (Infinity), and the flash mode is a (Flash Off). Also,  
the shutter speed is set to 4 seconds and the aperture is fixed to open.  
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are not available in c (Digital SR)  
mode.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Pictures of People (Portrait Mode)  
c (Portrait) mode is suitable for taking pictures of people. It reproduces  
a healthy and bright skin tone. The Face Detection function (p.80)  
operates for the shooting mode, making it easier to emphasize the  
subject’s face when taking pictures.  
Shutter release  
button  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
c (Portrait).  
Press the 4 button.  
The shooting mode is selected and the  
camera returns to capture mode.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
38  
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Pictures of Children (Kids Mode)  
R(Kids) mode is suitable for taking pictures of moving children. It also  
reproduces healthy and bright skin tone. Face Detection function (p.80)  
operates automatically in Rmode, making it easier to emphasize the  
subject’s face when taking pictures.  
Shutter release  
button  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
R(Kids).  
Press the 4 button.  
Kids mode is selected and the camera  
returns to capture mode.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
38  
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Pictures of Your Pet (Pet Mode)  
In e (Pet) mode, the camera automatically releases the shutter when  
the pet is detected. Also the camera can register pets.  
Shutter release  
button  
3 button  
Ibutton  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
3
Green button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select e (Pet).  
Press the 4 button.  
e (Pet) mode is selected and the  
camera returns to capture status.  
When the camera detects the pet’s full  
face, the shutter is automatically  
released.  
Selectiion / Registry  
38  
To Register the Pet  
1
Press the Ibutton on the  
capture status screen in  
e (Pet) mode.  
Selecting pet to shoot  
The pet registration screen appears.  
New Registry  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Press the Ibutton again.  
If pet face turns to camera  
front, it's self-registering  
The pet registration screen appears.  
Aiming the camera at the pet’s full face  
automatically releases the shutter and  
the pet registration confirmation dialog  
appears.  
MU  
Cancel  
Pet registration screen  
When you select [Registry] using four-  
way controller (2) and press the 4  
button, the picture of the registered  
pet is indicated on the upper-left  
corner of the display and the camera  
returns to the capture status.  
Register thhis image?  
3
Registry  
Cancel  
OK  
Registry confirmation screen  
When the camera detects the pet’s full  
face, the camera automatically  
releases the shutter.  
You can also take a picture by  
pressing the shutter release button.  
38  
Selectionn / Regiistry  
When you press the Ibutton twice in  
the capture status screen, the pet  
registration screen appears to register  
Capture status screen  
another pet. You can register up to three pets.  
• When you press the 3 button on the pet registration screen, the  
registration will be canceled and the camera returns to the still picture  
capture mode.  
• Only dogs and cats can be registered using the Pet Detection function.  
Other animals or human faces cannot be registered. You may not be  
able to register a pet’s face if, for example, the pet’s face is too small.  
• The camera may not detect the registered pet’s face, depending on the  
shooting situation.  
• You cannot turn off the LCD by pressing the 4/W button in  
e (Pet) mode.  
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are unavailable when the sensitivity  
is set to 3200/6400 in e (Pet) mode.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Switch the Pet You Want to Shoot  
If you have registered two or three pets, choose the pet you want to  
detect.  
1
Press the Ibutton on the  
capture status screen in  
e (Pet) mode.  
Selecting pet to shoot  
The pet registration screen appears.  
Delete  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
3
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the pet you  
want to detect.  
Press the 4 button.  
The selected pet is switched to the pet you want to detect and the  
camera returns to capture status.  
To Delete the Pet from the Entry  
1
Press the Ibutton on the  
capture status screen in  
e (Pet) mode.  
Selecting pet to shoot  
The pet registration screen appears.  
Delete  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the pet you  
want to delete.  
3
4
5
Press the Green button.  
Use the four-way controller (2) to select [Delete].  
Press the 4 button.  
The selected pet is deleted.  
• [Focusing Area] is set to W (Automatic Tracking AF) and the flash  
mode is set to a (Flash Off). However, you can change these settings.  
• [Focus Assist] is set to off. However, you can change this setting.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Pictures of Sports and Leisure Activities  
(Surf & Snow/Sport Mode)  
For bright images such as sand or snow. Accurately  
Surf & Snow  
Q
meters for bright scenes  
For a fast moving subject. Tracks the subject until the  
picture is taken  
Sport  
\
Shutter release  
button  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select Q(Surf  
& Snow) or \ (Sport).  
Press the 4 button.  
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture  
mode.  
When the camera detects a person’s face, the Face Detection function  
is activated and the face detection frame appears (p.80).  
4
Press the shutter release  
button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns  
green when the camera focuses on  
the subject at the correct distance.  
38  
When the Sport mode is selected, the  
focus frame follows the subject while  
the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Taking Pictures of Text (Text Mode)  
Take crisp and easy-to-read pictures of text. It is useful for taking  
pictures of and saving important documents, and when the text is too  
small and difficult to read.  
Color  
A picture of the text is taken in its original color.  
The colors are reversed.  
3
Reversed Color  
B&W  
A picture of the text is taken in black and white.  
Black and white are reversed.  
Negative  
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select (Text).  
Press the 4 button.  
The text mode selection screen  
appears.  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select  
,
,
, or  
.
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
Press the 4 button.  
The selected icon appears and the  
camera returns to capture status.  
38  
6
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
3
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Taking Pictures in Digital Microscope Mode  
In the Digital Microscope mode, you can take pictures of objects as close  
as 1 cm, also because the macro lights around the lens are always  
lighted, you can take minute pictures of text, the veins of leaves, or  
specimens of tiny insects etc.  
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at h (1920×1080).  
• The focus mode is fixed at  
(1cm Macro).  
• The default setting is O (On) for Pixel Track SR.  
j (Continuous Shooting) /c (Burst Shooting)/l (Auto Bracketing)  
cannot be selected.  
• The flash does not discharge in this mode.  
• The Face Detection function and the Blink Detection function are  
turned off.  
• You can change the information display only between the normal and  
No Info displays.  
• The illumination of the macro lights may be uneven or insufficient  
depending on the shooting conditions.  
1
Press four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
(Digital Microscope).  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Digital Microscope mode is selected  
and the camera returns to capture  
mode.  
38  
Press the w/x button.  
If you press x, the camera enlarges  
the subject.  
36.81  
3
w Wide (left)  
Widens the area that is  
captured by the camera.  
x Tele (right)  
38  
Enlarges the subject.  
5
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green at the position where the  
camera focuses on the subject.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Attaching the supplied macro stand (O-MS1) reduces camera shake  
during macro photography (p.24).  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Framing Your Pictures (Frame Composite Mode)  
In N (Frame Composite) mode, you can take pictures using the frames  
stored in the camera.  
Shutter release button  
f/y button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
3
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
N (Frame Composite).  
Press the 4 button.  
The 12-frame display of the frame selection screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose the frame  
you want to use.  
OK  
OK  
5
Press the y button.  
The selected frame appears in single-image display.  
You can choose another frame using either of the following operations.  
Four-way controller (45) Press to choose a different frame.  
Zoom button (f)  
Press to return to the 12-frame display of the frame  
selection screen, and then perform step 4 to  
choose a different frame.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Press the 4 button.  
The frame appears on the display.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
38  
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
3
8
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at h (2048×1536)/  
h (1920×1080).  
• You cannot turn off the LCD by pressing the 4/W button in  
N (Frame composite) mode.  
• At shipment, the camera includes 3 default frames for each aspect  
ratio (4:3 and 16:9). (The CD-ROM supplied with the camera contains  
a total of 90 frames, including the default frames.)  
Optional Frames  
The optional frames are stored in the CD-ROM (S-SW117) supplied with the  
camera. To use these frames, copy them from the CD-ROM. These optional  
frames are deleted if the files on the built-in memory are deleted with a  
computer or if the built-in memory is formatted.  
Adding a Frame to a captured image 1p.204  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Self-timer  
In Self-timer mode, the picture is taken ten seconds or two seconds after  
the shutter release button is pressed.  
Stabilize the camera with a tripod or other support when taking a picture  
with the self-timer.  
Use this mode when you want to be included in a group picture. The picture  
is taken approximately ten seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.  
g
Use this mode to avoid camera shake. The picture is taken approximately two  
seconds after the shutter release button is pressed.  
Z
3
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g and press  
the four-way controller (3).  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or Z and  
press the 4 button.  
Drive Mode  
The camera is ready to take the  
Self-timer  
picture using the self-timer.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
activated and the face detection frame appears (p.80).  
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Countdown starts and the remaining seconds are displayed on the screen.  
If you select g  
The self timer lamp and all of the macro lights turn on.  
From 4 seconds before shooting, the macro lights turn off in order  
from the top right.  
From 3 seconds before shooting, the self timer lamp also blinks.  
If you select Z  
The self timer lamp and the macro lights blink.  
The picture is taken after a countdown of either ten seconds or two seconds.  
3
Focusing may be compromised if you move the camera while the self-  
timer lamp is blinking when taking still pictures.  
• In C (Movie) mode, recording will start after ten seconds (or two  
seconds).  
• Press the shutter release button halfway while the self-timer is engaged  
to stop the countdown and press fully to restart the countdown.  
Z cannot be selected while 9 (Green) mode is in default setting.  
Select Z in another shooting mode and then switch the shooting mode  
to 9.  
• The self-timer lamp does not flash in e (Pet) mode.  
• In the following situations, the macro lights remain turned on  
regardless of the countdown.  
- In the Digital Microscope mode  
- When [Macro Light] on the [A Rec. Mode] menu is set to O (On)  
Taking a Series of Pictures (Continuous  
Shooting/Burst Shooting)  
Pictures are taken continuously as long as the shutter release button is  
pressed.  
Each time a picture is taken, the image is saved in the memory  
before the next image is taken. The higher the image quality,  
the longer the interval between shots.  
Continuous  
Shooting  
j
The number of recorded pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/  
Burst  
Shooting  
(2592×1464) and the interval between shots is shorter  
c
than “Continuous Shooting”.  
* The number of images that can be shot continuously and the interval between  
shots depend on shooting situations.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
3
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select j or c and  
press the 4 button.  
Drive Mode  
The camera is ready for continuous  
Continuous Shooting  
shooting and burst shooting.  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Pictures are taken continuously as long as you keep the shutter  
release button pressed.  
• The flash does not discharge in j and c modes.  
j and c cannot be selected in 9 (Green), b (Auto Picture),  
(Digital Microscope), A (Night Scene), C (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie), S(Fireworks), N (Frame Composite),  
X(Digital Wide) or F (Digital Panorama) modes.  
• Digital Zoom and Intelligent Zoom are unavailable when the sensitivity  
is set to 3200 and higher.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• With j, you can continue shooting until the memory capacity of the  
SD Memory Card or built-in memory is full.  
• The interval of j varies according to the [Recorded Pixels] and  
[Quality Level] settings.  
• The focus, exposure and white balance are locked with the first shot.  
• When the Face Detection function is activated (p.80), it works only  
when taking the first shot.  
• The Blink Detection function works only for the last shot.  
• The number of recorded pixels is fixed at f/  
in c mode. When  
the shooting mode is set to  
(Report), the number of recorded  
pixels is set to V (1280×960).  
3
Taking Pictures Using the Remote Control Unit  
(Optional)  
You can use the remote control (optional) to take pictures while you are  
away from the camera.  
3-sec Remote The shutter will be released after about three seconds when  
i
Control  
the shutter release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
0-sec Remote The shutter will be released immediately when the shutter  
h
Control  
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select i and press  
the four-way controller (3).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select i or h and  
press the 4 button.  
The self-timer lamp begins to blink  
slowly and the camera is ready to take  
a picture with the remote control.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
face, the Face Detection function is activated and the face detection  
frame appears (p.80).  
Drive Mode  
Remotee Controol  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
3
Point the remote control at the remote control receiver  
and press the shutter release button on the remote  
control.  
The focus frame turns green when the subject is in focus and the  
camera takes a picture at the following timing.  
When i (3-sec Remote Control) is selected:  
The self-timer lamp and the macro lights blink quickly and the  
camera takes a picture after about three seconds.  
When h (0-sec Remote Control) is selected:  
The camera takes a picture immediately.  
• The operating range is approx. 4 m (13 ft) from the front of the camera  
when using the remote control unit.  
• In C (Movie) mode, pressing the shutter release button again stops  
the recording.  
• The camera takes a picture even if the focus is not achieved.  
• If the shutter release button on the camera is pressed halfway during  
the countdown, the countdown stops. If the shutter release button on  
the remote control is pressed again, the camera starts the countdown  
again.  
i/hcannot be selected in 9 (Green) mode.  
• The self-timer lamp does not flash in e (Pet) mode.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Pictures at a Set Interval (Interval Shoot)  
In this mode, a set number of pictures can be taken automatically at a  
set interval from a set time.  
Set the camera to take pictures at intervals. The  
intervals can be set in increments of one second from  
Interval  
10 sec. – 99 min.  
ten seconds to 4 minutes, or in 1 minute increments  
from 4 to 99 minutes. You cannot set the camera to  
take interval shots at less than ten seconds.  
Number  
of Shots  
2 shots – number of You can set this to up to 1000 shots. However, it  
recordable images cannot exceed the number of recordable images.  
3
You can set 1 minute increments for the first 59  
minutes and 1 hour increments from there. If the  
start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken  
as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.  
Start Delay 0 min. – 24 hours  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select k (Interval  
Shoot) and press the  
4
button.  
Drive Mode  
Interval Shoot  
The current interval shoot settings  
appear for approximately 1 minute. To  
take pictures with the current settings,  
go to step 10.  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
3
4
Press the 4 button while the settings are displayed.  
The [Interval Shoot] setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with  
the frame.  
Set the interval.  
Interval Shoot  
1
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Interval  
0
0
min. 10sec.  
2
2 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the minutes, then press the  
four-way controller (5).  
Number of Shots  
Start Delay  
hr.  
0min.  
MENU  
3 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the seconds, then press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Interval].  
5
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Number of Shots].  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
Set the number of shots.  
1 Press the four-way controller (5).  
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set [Number of Shots],  
then press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Number of Shots].  
7
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Start Delay].  
8
Set the start delay.  
1 Press the four-way controller (5).  
3
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the hours, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Start Delay].  
9
Press the 3 button.  
The [Interval Shoot] settings are saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
10 Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.  
11 Press the shutter release button fully.  
Interval shooting starts.  
The LCD turns off between shots (during standby). Press the power  
switch during standby to display the remaining number of shots and  
interval on the monitor.  
The [Stop interval shooting?] message is displayed when the power  
switch and then the 3 button are pressed during standby.  
Pressing the 4 button cancels interval shooting.  
• Interval Shoot is unavailable in b (Auto Picture), 9 (Green),  
F (Digital Panorama), X(Digital Wide), S(Fireworks) and  
O (Voice Recording) modes.  
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring during interval shooting.  
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted  
during standby.  
The Interval Shoot settings can also be configured from the [A Rec.  
Mode] menu. (p.136)  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Pictures with Automatic Exposure  
Adjustment (Auto Bracketing)  
Press the shutter release button once to automatically adjust the  
exposure and take three pictures in succession. After taking the pictures,  
you can select the best one.  
The shooting order is best exposure  
–1.0 EV  
+1.0 EV.  
Shutter release  
button  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in A mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a (Auto  
Bracketing) and press the 4  
Drive Mode  
button.  
Auto Brackketing  
The camera is now ready to take  
pictures with Auto Bracketing.  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Press the shutter release button once to automatically adjust the  
exposure and take the three pictures at different exposures.  
• When the Instant Review is set to on (p.139), the pictures taken are  
shown in Instant Review after shooting (p.77).  
• Auto Bracketing is unavailable in C (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie),  
b (Auto Picture),  
(Digital Microscope), 9 (Green),  
S(Fireworks), F (Digital Panorama), X(Digital Wide),  
N (Frame Composite) and O (Voice Recording) modes.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using the Digital Wide Function (Digital Wide  
Mode)  
In X(Digital Wide) mode, you can stitch two vertical images captured  
with this camera into a single frame up to approx. 21 mm coverage (35  
mm film equivalent).  
3
+
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select X  
(Digital Wide).  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Press the 4 button.  
1
38  
The camera enters the Xmode.  
Turn the camera 90° clockwise and align  
your first picture.  
When the camera detects a person’s face,  
the Face Detection function is activated and  
the face detection frame appears (p.80).  
3
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
2
The first captured image is temporarily  
saved, and the shooting screen for the  
second image is displayed.  
OK  
Exit  
6
Take the second image.  
Overlap the image on the preview guide on the left of the screen to  
compose the second image. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to take the second  
image. This combines first and second images.  
The stitched first and second image appears on the display temporarily  
(Instant Review), and then is saved.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• To minimize distortion when taking the second image, turn the camera  
so that it pivots around the right edge of the preview guide on the  
screen.  
• Some distortion may result from moving objects, repeating patterns, or  
if nothing exists when overlapping the first and second image on the  
preview guide.  
• When the Face Detection function is activated (p.80), it works only  
when taking the first shot.  
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured with Xmode is  
fixed at f (2592×1944).  
(1cm Macro) is unavailable in Xmode.  
3
• You cannot change the information on the display by pressing the 4/  
W button in X(Digital Wide) mode.  
To Cancel after Taking the First Shot  
1
When the shooting screen for the second image is  
displayed in step 5 on p.112, press the 4 button or the  
four-way controller (3).  
A confirmation dialog appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select an option and  
Save the image(s) and  
exit this screen?  
press the 4 button.  
Save  
Discard  
Cancel  
Save  
Saves the first image and you  
can retake the first shot. The  
first image is saved at  
OK  
h
(2048×1536).  
Discard  
Cancel  
Discards the first image and  
you can retake the first shot.  
Returns to the shooting  
screen for the second image.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taking Panoramic Pictures (Digital Panorama  
Mode)  
In F (Digital Panorama) mode, you can stitch together two or three  
captured frames to create a panoramic photograph with the camera.  
Shutter release  
button  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select F  
(Digital Panorama).  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera enters the F mode and the message [Set shift direction]  
is displayed.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the direction  
in which the images will be  
Set shift direction  
joined.  
The screen for taking the first frame is  
displayed.  
When the camera detects a person’s  
1
face, the Face Detection function is  
activated and the face detection frame  
38  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The screen for taking the second frame is displayed after you take the  
first frame.  
If you select right (5) in step 4:  
The right edge of the first frame appears in semi-transparent form on  
the left edge of the display.  
3
If you select left (4) in step 4:  
The left edge of the first frame appears in semi-transparent form on  
the right edge of the display.  
7
Take the second frame.  
1
2
Move the camera so that the semi-  
transparent image and the actual view  
overlap and press the shutter release  
button.  
SUTTER  
Exit  
2nd Frame  
8
Take the third frame.  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to take the third frame.  
The panorama images are joined and a stitched together image  
appears.  
The stitched together image does not appear when [Instant Review]  
• Some distortion may result from moving objects, repeating patterns, or  
if nothing exists when overlapping the first and second frames or the  
second and third frames on the preview guide.  
• When the Face Detection function is activated (p.80), it works only  
when taking the first shot.  
• You cannot turn off the LCD by pressing the 4/W button in  
F (Digital Panorama) mode.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To Cancel after Taking the First or Second Frame  
1
After shooting the first frame in step 6 on p.115 or the  
second frame in step 7, press the 4 button or the  
four-way controller (3).  
A confirmation dialog appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select an option and  
press the 4 button.  
Save the image(s) and  
exit this screen?  
Save  
3
Discard  
Cancel  
Save  
Saves the captured image(s) and  
you can retake the first frame.  
When this option is selected after  
shooting the second frame, the  
first and the second frames are  
stitched together and saved as a  
panoramic photograph.  
OK  
OK  
Discard Discards the captured image(s)  
and you can retake the first frame.  
Cancel Returns to the previous shooting  
screen.  
Unstitched images shot in F mode are fixed at i (1600×1200).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Shooting Functions  
Selecting the Flash Mode  
The flash discharges automatically depending on the light  
conditions.  
Auto  
,
The flash does not discharge, regardless of the brightness.  
Use this mode to take pictures where flash photography is  
prohibited.  
Flash Off  
Flash On  
a
b
c
The flash discharges regardless of the brightness.  
3
This mode reduces the phenomenon of red eyes caused by  
Auto + Red-eye the light from the flash being reflected in the subject’s eyes.  
The flash discharges automatically.  
This mode reduces the phenomenon of red eyes caused by  
Flash On +  
the light from the flash being reflected in the subject’s eyes.  
Red-eye  
d
The flash discharges regardless of the light conditions.  
• The flash mode is fixed at a in the following situations:  
- When C (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie),  
(Digital Microscope),  
or S(Fireworks) is selected as the capture mode.  
- When j (Continuous Shooting), c (Burst Shooting), or l (Auto  
Bracketing) is selected as the Drive Mode.  
- When s (Infinity) is selected as the focus mode.  
• In 9 (Green) mode, you can only select , or a.  
• In A (Night Scene) mode, you cannot select , and c.  
• If you use the Face Detection function when , is selected, the mode  
is automatically set to d.  
• A pre-flash discharges when using the red-eye reduction function.  
Using the flash when capturing images at a close distance may cause  
irregularities in the image due to the light distribution.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller  
(4) in A mode.  
3
Flash Mode  
Auto  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
The flash mode changes each time  
the button is pressed. You can also  
change the setting using the four-way  
controller (23).  
U  
Cancel  
OK  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
About the red-eye phenomenon  
Taking pictures using the flash may cause the subject’s eyes to appear red in  
the resulting picture. This phenomenon occurs when the light from the flash is  
reflected in the subject’s eyes. It can be reduced by illuminating the area around  
the subject or moving closer to the subject and zooming out to a wider angle.  
Setting the flash mode to c (Auto + Red-eye) or d (Flash On + Red-eye) is also  
an effective way of reducing red eyes.  
If the subject’s eyes appear red despite such precautions, they can be corrected  
by the red-eye compensation function (p.203).  
Saving the Flash Mode setting 1p.158  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Focus Mode  
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 50 cm  
Standard  
Macro  
to . The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus area  
=
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 10 cm  
to 60 cm. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus  
area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
q
This mode is used when the distance to the subject is from 1 cm  
to 30 cm. The camera is focused on the subject in the autofocus  
area when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
1cm Macro  
3
This mode is used when you ask someone to take pictures for  
you, or when taking pictures of the scenery through the window  
of a car or train. The entire picture, from the front to the back, is  
focused.  
Pan Focus  
Infinity  
3
This mode is used for taking distant objects. The flash is set to  
a (Flash Off).  
s
Manual Focus This mode lets you adjust the focus manually.  
\
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller  
(5) in A mode.  
Focus Mode  
Standard  
The [Focus Mode] screen appears.  
The focus mode changes each time  
the button is pressed. You can also  
change the setting using the four-way  
controller (23).  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• In 9 (Green) mode, you can only select =, q, or 3.  
(1cm Macro) is unavailable in X(Digital Wide) mode.  
• The focus mode is fixed at s in S(Fireworks) mode.  
• The noise from focusing is recorded when a focus mode other than 3  
or s is selected in C (Movie) and  
(Underwater Movie) modes.  
• When [Auto Macro] is on and shooting with q selected, if the subject  
is further than 60 cm away, the camera automatically focuses to  
(Infinity).  
Saving the Focus Mode setting 1p.158  
3
To Set the Manual Focus  
The procedure for setting the focus manually (\) is described below.  
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in A mode.  
The [Focus Mode] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (5) to select \.  
Press the 4 button.  
Focus Mode  
Manual Focus  
The central portion of the image is  
magnified to full screen on the display.  
MU  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the four-way controller  
(23).  
The \ indicator appears on the  
display to indicate the approximate  
distance to the subject. Use the four-  
way controller (23) to adjust the  
focus using the indicator as a guide.  
2 for distant focus  
3 for closer focus  
2
m
1
0.5  
U  
OK  
\ indicator  
Press the 4 button.  
The focus is fixed and the camera returns to capture mode.  
After the focus is fixed, you can press the four-way controller (5) again  
to display the \ indicator and readjust the focus.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The shooting mode and drive mode cannot be changed while the \  
indicator is displayed.  
To switch from \ to another focus mode, press the four-way controller  
(5) while the \ indicator is displayed.  
Changing the Focusing Area (= area)  
You can change the autofocus area (Focusing Area).  
3
J
K
Multiple  
Normal autofocus area  
Spot  
The autofocus area becomes smaller.  
Keeps moving subjects in focus.  
W
Automatic Tracking AF  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Setting].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [AF Setting] screen appears.  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Focusing  
Area].  
Press the four-way controller  
AF Setting  
(5).  
Focusing Area  
Auto Macro  
Focus Assist  
A pull-down menu appears.  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the  
Focusing Area.  
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• In C (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie) and N (Frame Composite)  
modes, W cannot be selected.  
• In S(Fireworks), 9 (Green) and b (Auto Picture) modes, the  
focusing area is fixed at J.  
Setting the Auto Macro  
3
When [Auto Macro] is on, the focus is adjusted to the macro range  
(distance to the subject is 10 cm to 60 cm) as necessary, even if the  
focus mode setting is AF (Standard).  
When it is off and the focus mode is set to Standard (=), the AF operates  
only in the standard range, and focusing is not done in the macro range.  
When the focus mode is set to Macro or 1cm Macro, the focus is only  
adjusted in the respective macro range and is not done in the standard  
range.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Setting].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [AF Setting] screen appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Auto Macro].  
AF Setting  
Focusing Area  
Auto Macro  
Focus Assist  
MENU  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select [  
The setting is saved.  
O
(On)/  
P
(Off)].  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the = Assist Light (Focus Assist)  
The camera automatically emits the Focus assist light in dark shooting  
situations. You can set the light to on or off.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Setting].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [AF Setting] screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Focus  
AF Setting  
Focusing Area  
Auto Macro  
Assist].  
Focus Assist  
MENU  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select [  
The setting is saved.  
O
(On)/  
P
(Off)].  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
Looking at the light directly will not create a safety hazard. However, do  
not look into the emitter from a very short distance since you may feel  
dazzled.  
The camera does not emit the Focus Assist light under the following  
conditions.  
• In C (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie) or S(Fireworks) mode  
• When the focus mode is set to 3 (Pan Focus), s (Infinity) or z  
(Manual Focus).  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Image Tone  
For setting the tone of images.  
You can select from [Bright], [Natural], or [Monochrome].  
The default setting is [Bright].  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Image  
Tone].  
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
1/4  
(23) to select a finishing  
tone.  
Image Tone  
Bright  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
Natural  
Monochrome  
AWB  
AE Metering  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• When [Monochrome] is selected, [Tone Adjustment] appears on the  
[A Rec. Mode] menu for setting the tone of monochrome images  
instead of [Saturation].  
• Select [Monochrome] in  
setting to [Standard].  
(Report) mode to fix the Tone Adjustment  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels  
You can choose recorded pixels settings for still pictures.  
The larger the number of recorded pixels, the clearer the details will appear  
when you print your picture. As the quality of the printed picture also  
depends on the image quality, exposure control, resolution of the printer,  
and other factors, you do not need to select more than the required number  
of recorded pixels. h is adequate for making postcard-size prints. The  
more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file size.  
Refer to the following table for the appropriate settings according to  
expected usage.  
3
Recorded Pixels  
Expected Usage  
g
4288×3216  
3216×3216  
For printing high quality photos or A4-size pictures or  
larger, or editing images on a computer.  
j
i 4224×2376  
6
f
h
3072×2304  
3072×1728  
2592×1944  
2592×1464  
2048×1536  
For making postcard-size prints.  
h 1920×1080  
V
l
m
1280×960  
1024×768  
640×480  
For posting on a website or attaching to e-mail.  
• The default setting is g.  
V (1280×960) can only be set for recorded pixels when  
(Report) mode is set.  
V does not appear in the Recorded Pixels menu.  
If you select i/  
/
/
P
h, the aspect ratio of the screen is  
16:9. The monitor display for recording  
and playback is as shown on the right.  
38  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recorded  
Pixels].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Recordable Image No.  
12  
(23) to change the number  
of recorded pixels.  
14  
M
10M  
10M  
Image Tone  
3
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
7
5
5
M
M
M
AE Metering  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in 9 (Green)  
mode is fixed at g.  
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in N (Frame  
Composite) is fixed at h/h.  
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in X(Digital  
Wide) mode is fixed at f. (The number of recorded pixels will be h  
if you exit Digital Wide mode without taking the second picture.)  
• The number of recorded pixels for images shot in  
(Report) mode  
is set to V (1280×960).  
• If you take and save only the first frame in F (Digital Panorama)  
mode, the number of recorded pixels is fixed at i.  
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in c (Digital SR)  
mode is fixed at f/  
.
• The number of recorded pixels for images captured in  
(Digital  
Microscope) mode is fixed at h.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Quality Level of Still Pictures  
Select the quality (data compression ratio) for still images according to  
how the images will be used.  
The more stars (E), the higher the quality of the image, but the file size  
increases. The selected Recorded Pixels setting also affects the size of  
the image file (1p.125).  
Quality Level  
Best  
Lowest compression ratio. Suitable for photo prints.  
C
D
Standard compression ratio. Suitable for viewing the image  
on a computer screen. (default setting)  
3
Better  
Highest compression ratio. Suitable for attaching to e-mails  
or creating websites.  
Good  
E
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality  
Level].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Recordable Image No.  
12  
(23) to change the quality  
level.  
The maximum number of pictures you  
can take is displayed at the top of the  
screen when you select a quality  
level.  
Image Tone  
Bright  
14  
M
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
ڎ
ڎڎ
 
ڎ
ڎ
 
ڎ
AE Metering  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready for taking pictures.  
In 9 (Green) mode, the quality level is fixed at D (Better).  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the White Balance  
You can take pictures in natural colors by adjusting the white balance  
according to the light conditions at the time of shooting.  
Auto  
The camera adjusts the white balance automatically.  
Use this mode when taking pictures outside in sunlight.  
F
G
Daylight  
Shade  
Use this mode when taking pictures outside in the shade.  
l
Use this mode when taking pictures under electric or other  
tungsten light.  
Tungsten Light  
I
Use this mode when taking pictures under fluorescent  
light.  
3
Fluores. Light  
Manual  
J
K
Use this mode when adjusting the white balance manually.  
• Set another white balance if you are not satisfied with the color  
balance of pictures taken with the white balance set to F.  
• Depending on the selected shooting mode, the white balance setting  
may not be changed. Refer to “Functions Available for Each Shooting  
Mode” (p.284) for details.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [White  
Balance].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [White Balance] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
White Balance  
(23) to change the setting.  
Auto  
You can check the results of available  
white balance settings on the preview  
image each time you press the four-  
M
OK  
Cancel  
way controller.  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
Refer to the following “Manual Setting” for instructions on adjusting the  
white balance manually.  
If you change the [White Balance] setting frequently, you can save time  
by assigning the Fn settings to the Green button (p.139).  
Saving the White Balance setting 1p.158  
3
Manual Setting  
Have a blank sheet of white paper or similar material ready.  
1
In the [White Balance] screen, use the four-way  
controller (23) to select K (Manual).  
2
Point the camera at the blank  
sheet of paper or other  
White Balance  
material so that it fills the  
frame displayed in the center  
of the screen.  
UTTER  
Adjust  
M
OK  
Cancel  
3
4
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The white balance is automatically adjusted.  
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved and the screen returns to the [A Rec. Mode]  
menu.  
5
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the AE Metering  
You can set the area of the screen where the brightness is metered to  
determine the exposure.  
Multi-segment The camera divides the image into 256 areas, meters the  
L
M
N
metering  
brightness and determines the exposure.  
Center-  
weighted  
metering  
The camera takes a reading of the overall brightness of the  
picture with the center of the image having more influence  
on the exposure.  
Spot AE  
metering  
The camera determines the exposure by metering the  
brightness only at the center of the image.  
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AE Metering].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a metering  
method.  
Rec. Mode  
1/4  
Image Tone  
Bright  
14  
ڎ
ڎ
 
M
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
AF Setting  
AE Metering  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway, the brightness is  
metered and the exposure is determined.  
• When the subject is outside the focusing area and you want to use  
Spot AE metering, aim the camera at the subject and press and hold  
the shutter release button halfway to lock the exposure, then compose  
your picture again and press the shutter release button fully.  
• Depending on the selected shooting mode, the [AE Metering] setting  
may not be changed. Refer to “Functions Available for Each Shooting  
Mode” (p.284) for details.  
Saving the AE Metering setting 1p.158  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Sensitivity  
You can select the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.  
The sensitivity is automatically adjusted by the camera.  
AUTO  
(Default value: sensitivity 80-800)  
80  
The lower the sensitivity, the less noise that affects the image. The  
shutter speed will be slower in low light conditions.  
100  
200  
400  
800  
3
1600  
Higher sensitivity settings use faster shutter speeds in low light  
3200  
6400  
conditions to reduce camera shake, but the image may be affected  
by noise.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sensitivity].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to change the  
sensitivity.  
Rec. Mode  
2/4  
AUTO  
Sensitivity  
80  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
Movie  
100  
200  
400  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• When the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400, the number of recorded  
pixels is fixed at f (2592×1944)/ (2592×1464).  
• When set to (Digital SR), 9 (Green), C (Movie), or  
c
(Underwater Movie) mode, only [AUTO] is available.  
• When set to S(Fireworks) mode, the sensitivity is fixed at 80.  
• When the shooting mode is set to  
(Report), the AUTO is fixed at  
80-6400. Other sensitivities can also be selected.  
Saving the Sensitivity setting 1p.158  
3
Setting AUTO ISO Range  
Set the sensitivity range when the sensitivity is set to AUTO.  
The sensitivity can be set to 80-100, 80-200, 80-400, 80-800, and 80-1600.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AUTO ISO  
Range].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
2/4  
(23) to select the sensitivity  
adjustment range.  
Sensitivity  
AUTO  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
Movie  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR  
ISO80-100  
ISO80-200  
ISO80-400  
ISO80-800  
ISO80-1600  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
When the Sensitivity is set to 80 or 100 and Highlight Correction is set to  
O (On), the setting changes to 160. The setting returns when Highlight  
Correction is set to P (Off).  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Exposure (EV Compensation)  
For adjusting the overall brightness of the picture.  
Use this function to take pictures that are intentionally overexposed or  
underexposed.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [EV  
Compensation].  
3
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
2/4  
(45) to select the EV value.  
To brighten, select a positive (+)  
value. To darken, select a negative  
(–) value.  
Sensitivity  
AUTO  
ISO80-800  
0.0  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
Movie  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR  
MENU  
You can choose the EV setting in the  
range of –2.0 EV to +2.0 EV in 1/3 EV  
steps.  
Exit  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• When a histogram is displayed in Still Picture Capture mode or  
Playback mode, you can check whether the exposure is correct (p.33).  
• EV Compensation cannot be used in b (Auto Picture) or 9 (Green)  
mode.  
Saving the EV Compensation setting 1p.158  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Correcting the Brightness (D-Range Setting)  
Expands the dynamic range and prevents bright and dark areas from  
occurring. [Highlight Correction] adjusts the bright areas when the image  
is too bright and [Shadow Correction] adjusts the dark areas when the  
image is too dark.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [D-Range  
Setting].  
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
D-Range Setting  
(23) to select [Highlight  
Correction] or [Shadow  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
Correction].  
MENU  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
P
The camera returns to capture status.  
The D-Range Setting icon appears on  
the display.  
When [Highlight Correction] is set  
to O  
38  
P
When [Shadow Correction] is set to  
O
Q
When [Highlight Correction] and  
[Shadow Correction] are set to O  
O
• When the Sensitivity is set to 80 or 100 and Highlight Correction is set  
to O (On), the setting changes to 160. The setting returns when  
Highlight Correction is set to P (Off).  
• If you change the [Highlight Correction] or [Shadow Correction] setting  
frequently, you can save time by assigning it to the Green button (p.139).  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D-Range settings are not applicable in b (Auto Picture)/9 (Green)  
modes.  
Setting Pixel Track SR  
You can set this function to correct for camera shake when taking still  
shots. If Pixel Track SR is set to O (On), the camera automatically  
corrects for camera shake in the images you shot. The default setting is  
P (Off).  
Shake reduction settings in C (Movie) and  
mode are configured under Movie SR (p.153).  
(Underwater Movie)  
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Pixel Track  
SR].  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
2/4  
(45) to switch between  
O (On) or P (Off).  
Sensitivity  
AUTO  
ISO80-800  
0.0  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
Movie  
O(On)  
Automatically corrects  
for camera shake.  
No correction for  
camera shake.  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR  
MENU  
Exit  
P (Off)  
The setting is saved.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• In 9 (Green), X(Digital Wide), F (Digital Panorama), C (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie), N (Frame Composite) and S(Fireworks)  
mode, the Pixel Track SR is fixed at P (Off).  
• Pixel Track SR does not function when the flash discharges even if  
[Pixel Track SR] is set to O (On).  
The Pixel Track SR may not be effective when the shutter speed is slow.  
We recommend you turn off the [Pixel Track SR] setting P (off) and use  
a tripod for slow shutter speeds.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Interval Shooting  
In this mode, a set number of pictures can be taken automatically at a  
set interval from a set time.  
Set the camera to take pictures at intervals. The  
intervals can be set in increments of one second  
from ten seconds to 4 minutes, or in 1 minute  
increments from 4 to 99 minutes. You cannot set  
the camera to take interval shots for less than ten  
seconds.  
Interval  
10 sec. – 99 min.  
Number  
of Shots  
2 shots – number of You can set this to up to 1000 shots. However, it  
recordable images cannot exceed the number of recordable images.  
3
You can set 1 minute increments for the first 59  
minutes and 1 hour increments from there. If the  
start time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken  
as soon as the shutter release button is pressed.  
Start Delay 0 min. – 24 hours  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Interval  
Shoot].  
Rec. Mode  
3/4  
Interval Shoot  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Memory  
Green Button  
MENU  
Exit  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Interval Shoot] setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with  
the frame.  
Set the interval.  
Interval Shoot  
1 Press the four-way controller  
Interval  
0
0
min. 10sec.  
2
(5).  
Number of Shots  
Start Delay  
2 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the minutes, then press the  
four-way controller (5).  
hr.  
0min.  
MENU  
3 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the seconds, then press the four-way controller (5).  
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Interval].  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Number of Shots].  
Set the number of shots.  
1 Press the four-way controller (5).  
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set [Number of Shots],  
then press the four-way controller (5).  
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Number of Shots].  
7
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Start Delay].  
3
8
Set the start delay.  
1 Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Interval Shoot  
Current Time  
Start Time  
10:00  
10:00  
The current time and the recording  
start time are displayed in real-time.  
0
hr.  
0
min.  
Start Delay  
2 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the hours, then press the  
four-way controller (5).  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The setting is saved, and the frame returns to [Start Delay].  
9
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to the shooting screen. The operations up to this  
point have only configured the [Interval Shoot] settings. To actually use  
interval shooting, you must select [Interval Shoot] from the drive mode.  
• Interval Shoot is unavailable in b (Auto Picture), 9 (Green),  
F (Digital Panorama), X(Digital Wide), S(Fireworks) and  
O (Voice Recording) modes.  
• Refer to p.154 for instructions on interval shooting for C (Movie) and  
(Underwater Movie).  
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring while interval shooting is  
being performed.  
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted  
during standby.  
The Interval Shoot settings can also be configured from the Drive Mode  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Blink Detection  
This specifies whether Blink Detection works when you use the Face  
Detection function. The default setting is O (On).  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Blink  
Detection].  
3
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
3/4  
(
45) to switch between  
O
Interval Shoot  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Memory  
(On) or (Off).  
P
O
(On)  
Blink Detection function  
works.  
Green Button  
MENU  
Exit  
P (Off)  
Blink Detection function  
does not work.  
The setting is saved.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
Blink Detection 1p.77  
If the Blink Detection function detected closed eyes when shooting,  
[Closed eyes have been detected] is displayed for 3 seconds during  
Instant Review.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Instant Review  
Use this setting to specify whether or not an Instant Review is displayed  
immediately after images are shot. The default setting is O (On: displays  
the image).  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Instant  
Review].  
3
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
3/4  
(45) to switch between O  
(On) or P (Off).  
Interval Shoot  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Memory  
O (On)  
Instant Review is  
displayed.  
Green Button  
MENU  
Exit  
P (Off)  
Instant Review is not  
displayed.  
The setting is saved.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
Instant Review 1p.77  
Setting the Green Button  
You can assign one of the following functions to the Green button:  
[Green Mode] (p.86), [Voice Recording] (p.222), [Movie] (p.150) or [Fn  
Setting] (p.141). You can activate the assigned function by just pressing  
the Green button.  
When the shooting mode is set to 9 (Green) Mode, [Green Button]  
settings cannot be configured on the [A Rec. Mode] menu. To configure  
the settings, first switch to a mode other than 9.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Assigning a Function  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Green  
Button].  
Rec. Mode  
3/4  
Interval Shoot  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
Instant Review  
Memory  
Green Button  
3
MENU  
Exit  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a function you  
Green Button  
Green Mode  
Voice Recording  
Movie  
Fn Setting  
want to assign.  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• [Green Mode] is registered as the default setting.  
• If you select [Movie] for both [Fn Setting] and Capture Mode, the Green  
Button does not function because the modes are the same.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Frequently Used Functions (Fn Setting)  
You can register frequently used functions on the four-way controller.  
Using this function, you can directly set the functions by pressing the  
four-way controller without displaying the menu in Capture mode.  
In [Fn Setting], still picture mode and Movie mode have different settings.  
To execute [Fn Setting] in movie mode, press the MENU button in Movie  
mode in step 1 on page p.140.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Fn Setting].  
Green Button  
Green Mode  
3
Voice Recording  
+
+
+
+
Movie  
Fn Setting  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
WB  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The [Fn Setting] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a key you want  
to assign a function to.  
Green Button  
Fn Setting  
EV Compensation  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
+
+
+
+
WBWhite Balance  
MENU  
7
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
8
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the function  
you want to register.  
Green Button  
EV Compensation  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
+
+
+
+
WB White Balance  
ISO Sensitivity  
AF Focusing Area  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
9
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
This function is activated only when you assign the [Fn Setting] to the  
Green button.  
You can assign only one function to each key.  
The default settings for Fn settings  
3
Still picture mode  
Default setting (2) EV Compensation  
(3) Recorded Pixels  
Movie mode  
(2) Movie SR  
(3) EV Compensation  
(4) Recorded Pixels  
(5) White Balance  
(4) Quality Level  
(5) White Balance  
Functions that can be assigned to each key  
Still picture mode  
Movie mode  
Recorded Pixels  
Selectable  
items  
EV Compensation  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
Movie SR  
White Balance  
Focusing Area  
EV Compensation  
Sharpness  
White Balance  
Sensitivity  
Focusing Area  
Auto Macro  
Saturation (Tone Adjustment) *  
Contrast  
AE Metering  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
Sharpness  
Saturation (Tone Adjustment) *  
Contrast  
* The items displayed change depending on the [Image Tone] selected  
on the [A Rec. Mode] menu. When you have selected either [Bright]  
or [Natural], [Saturation] is displayed, and when [Monochrome] is  
selected, [Tone Adjustment] is displayed.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Assigned Items  
Press the Green button in the shooting mode to display the Fn Setting  
screen. Select an item with the four-way controller (2345), and press  
either the (23) or (45) four-way controller to change the settings.  
Setting the Image Sharpness (Sharpness)  
You can give the image sharp or soft outlines.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
3
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sharpness].  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
4/4  
(45) to change the  
sharpness level.  
F Soft  
G Normal  
H Sharp  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
Off  
MENU  
Exit  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Saturation/Tone Adjustment  
You can set either color brightness (Saturation) or the tone of  
monochrome images (Tone Adjustment).  
The items displayed change depending on the [Image Tone] selected on  
the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
Selected Image Tone  
Bright, Natural  
Monochrome  
Displayed item  
Saturation  
Tone Adjustment  
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Saturation]  
(Tone Adjustment).  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
4/4  
(45) to select the level of  
saturation (or tone).  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
Off  
F
G
H
Low  
Normal (B&W for tone)  
High (Sepia for tone)  
(Blue for tone)  
MENU  
Exit  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting the Image Contrast (Contrast)  
For setting the image contrast level.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Contrast].  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
4/4  
(45) to change the contrast  
level.  
F Low  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
3
Off  
G Normal  
H High  
MENU  
Exit  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The setting is saved and the camera returns to capture mode.  
Setting the Date Imprint Function  
You can choose whether to imprint the date and/or time when taking still  
pictures.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Date Imprint].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the Date  
Imprint details.  
Choose from [Date], [Date & Time],  
Rec. Mode  
4/4  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
Date  
Date & Time  
Time  
Off  
[Time] or [Off].  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• The date and/or time imprinted with the [Date Imprint] function cannot  
be deleted.  
• Note that if the printer or the image editing software is set to print the  
date and the images to be printed already have the date and/or time  
imprinted, the imprinted dates and/or times may overlap.  
3
O appears on the display in  
A
mode when [Date Imprint] is set to  
any setting other than [Off].  
• The date and/or time are imprinted on the picture with the display  
format set in the [Date Adjustment] screen (p.55).  
Setting the IQ Enhancer Processing  
You can take pictures with clearer details by using image processing  
with IQ enhancer technique.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select  
[IQ Enhancer].  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
4/4  
(45) to select [O (On)/  
P (Off)].  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
Off  
O (On)  
IQ enhancer function  
works  
IQ enhancer function  
does not work  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
MENU  
Exit  
P (Off)  
The setting is saved.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IQ enhancer does not function in the following situations:  
• When the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400  
• In the c (Digital SR) mode  
• When the drive mode is set to c (Burst Shooting)  
Setting the Macro Light  
Set whether or not to turn on the macro lights around the lens.  
The macro lights turn on when the [Macro Light] is set to O (On).  
The default setting is P (Off).  
3
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Macro  
Light].  
Use the four-way controller  
Rec. Mode  
4/4  
(45) to select [O (On)/  
P (Off)].  
Sharpness  
Saturation  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
Off  
O (On)  
P (Off)  
Turns on the light  
Turns off the light  
MENU  
Exit  
The setting is saved.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
• In  
(Digital Microscope) mode, the macro lights turn on regardless of  
whether the setting is turned on or off.  
• If the Power Saving is set to on, the light turns off after the set time.  
• The macro lights turn off during playback and when using the USB  
connector except when outputting video in Digital Microscope mode.  
• Self-portrait Assist and Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture cannot be  
selected when [Macro Light] is set to O (On).  
If you take a picture using Self Timer or Remote Control while [Macro  
Light] is set to O (On), the macro lights remain on regardless of the  
countdown.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Pictures Underwater  
Taking Underwater Pictures (Underwater Mode/  
Underwater Movie Mode)  
This camera complies with JIS waterproof grade 8 and can be used to  
take pictures at a depth of 10 m continuously for 2 hours. In addition, this  
camera complies with JIS dustproof grade 6 (IP68).  
Use the Underwater mode to take underwater still pictures that capture the  
blueness of the sea.  
3
Use the Underwater Movie mode to record movies underwater.  
Shutter release  
button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
(Underwater) or  
(Underwater Movie).  
Press the 4 button.  
The shooting mode is selected and the camera returns to capture mode.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green when the camera focuses  
on the subject at the correct distance.  
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
If you selected  
If you selected  
, the picture is taken.  
, recording starts. To stop recording, press the  
shutter release button fully. Perform the same steps as C (Movie)  
mode to record movies.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• Before taking pictures underwater, make sure that there is no dirt or  
sand on the waterproof seal of the battery/card and terminal covers  
and check that the covers are securely locked.  
• Before opening the battery/card and terminal covers after using the  
camera underwater, make sure that there is no water, dirt, or sand on  
the covers or anywhere else on the camera. Wipe the camera before  
opening the covers.  
• In  
• The flash will not discharge in mode.  
mode, AE metering is set to multi-segment metering.  
3
• When the Focus Mode is set to \, you can adjust the focus before  
recording starts and during recording.  
• Optical and digital zoom can be used in Underwater Movie mode  
before recording starts. Digital Zoom can also be used during  
recording.  
Although the camera is designed to be waterproof and dustproof, avoid  
using the camera under the following conditions. It may momentarily be  
subjected to water pressure beyond that covered in the guarantee and  
water may enter the interior of the camera.  
• Jumping into the water while holding the camera  
• Swimming while holding the camera in your hand  
• Using the camera in environments where water is applied forcefully,  
such as strong river currents and waterfalls  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Movies  
Recording Movies  
This mode enables you to record movies. Sound is recorded at the same  
time.  
Shutter release button  
w/x button  
3
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in A mode.  
The Capture Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select C  
Movie  
1/2  
(Movie).  
For recording movies  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
3
Press the 4 button.  
1
C (Movie) mode is selected and the  
camera returns to capture mode.  
The following information appears on  
the display.  
1 Movie mode icon  
REC  
2 Movie shake reduction icon  
07:34  
3 Remaining recordable time  
4 REC indicator (blinks during  
2
3
4
5
recording)  
5 Focus frame (does not appear during recording)  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
You can change the captured area by pressing the w/x button.  
x
Enlarges the subject  
w
Widens the area that is captured by the camera  
4
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Recording starts. You can continue recording until the built-in memory  
or the SD Memory Card is full, or the size of the recorded movie  
reaches 2 GB.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Recording stops.  
3
• The flash does not discharge in C (Movie) mode.  
• The focus mode can be changed before recording starts.  
• When the focus mode is set to \(Manual Focus), you can adjust the  
focus before recording starts.  
• Optical and digital zoom can be used before recording starts. Digital  
zoom is available during recording when digital zoom (p.90) is set to  
O (On).  
• When the shooting mode is set to C (Movie), Face Detection is  
automatically set to on. You can select Smile Capture or Face  
Detection Off by pressing the Ibutton before starting recording a  
movie (p.80). When Smile Capture function is activated, movie  
recording starts automatically when the camera recognizes the  
subject’s smile. However, depending on the condition of the  
recognized faces, movie recording may not start automatically  
because the Smile Capture function may not work. If this happens,  
press the shutter release button to start movie recording.  
• The volume of recorded audio may vary depending on the orientation  
of the microphone, which is on the front of the camera.  
You can record a movie using the remote control unit (optional) (p.106).  
• When you change the display by pressing the 4/W button  
while recording a movie, the histogram is not displayed.  
Keeping the Shutter Release Button Pressed  
If you keep the shutter release button pressed for more than one second,  
recording will continue as long as you keep the button pressed. Shooting  
stops when you take your finger off the shutter release button.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels and  
Frame Rate for Movies  
You can choose the number of recorded pixels and frame rate settings  
for movies.  
The more pixels there are, the clearer the details and the bigger the file  
size. The more frames per second, the better the quality of the movie,  
but the file size becomes larger.  
Recorded  
Pixels  
Frame  
Rate  
Setting  
Use  
3
Records images in HDTV format (16:9). Movement  
is recorded smoothly. (default setting)  
M
1280×720  
1280×720  
640×480  
640×480  
320×240  
320×240  
30 fps  
Records images in HDTV format (16:9). Increases  
F
G
H
I
J
15 fps the total recording time by making the file size  
smaller.  
Suitable for viewing on a TV or computer screen.  
Movement is recorded smoothly.  
30 fps  
Suitable for viewing on a TV or computer screen.  
15 fps Increases the total recording time by making the file  
size smaller.  
Suitable for posting on a website or attaching to e-  
30 fps  
mail. Movement is recorded smoothly.  
Suitable for posting on a website or attaching to e-  
15 fps mail. Increases the total recording time by making  
the file size smaller.  
* The frame rate (fps) indicates the number of frames per second.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Movie] screen appears.  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recorded  
Pixels].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to change the number  
of recorded pixels and frame  
rate.  
Rec. Time  
02:26  
Recorded Pixels  
Movie SR  
Interval Shoot  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
3
8
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
The following restrictions may cause the selected recording time and the  
actual recording time to be different.  
• The maximum size of a file is limited to 2 GB.  
Setting the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction)  
Function  
In  
C
(Movie) mode, you can compensate for camera shake while you are  
recording a movie with the Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction) function.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Movie] screen appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie SR].  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
6
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select O (On) or  
P (Off).  
Movie  
Recorded Pixels  
Movie SR  
Interval Shoot  
O(On)  
Automatically corrects  
for camera shake.  
No correction for  
camera shake.  
MENU  
P (Off)  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
3
Recording a Movie from Pictures Taken at a Set  
Interval (Interval Movie)  
In this mode, you can record multiple still pictures taken automatically at  
a set interval from a set time, as a movie file.  
Interval  
You can set this to 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour.  
Set the total time, from 10 minutes to 359 hours. The total time and the  
Total Time settable units change depending on the interval set. The Interval can be set  
in increments of 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour.  
Set the start delay, from 0 minutes to 24 hours. The start delay can be  
set in increments of 1 minute for a delay time up to 59 minutes, and  
Start Delay increments of 1 hour for a delay time longer than one hour. If the start  
time is set to 0 minutes, the first picture is taken as soon as the shutter  
release button is pressed.  
Setting from Drive Mode  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in C or  
mode.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select k (Interval  
Shoot) and press the 4  
Drive Mode  
Interval Shoot  
button.  
The current Interval Movie setting  
appears for approximately one  
minute. To take pictures with the  
current settings, go to step 10.  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3
4
Press the 4 button while the settings are displayed.  
The Interval Movie setting screen appears. [Interval] is marked with the  
frame.  
Set the interval.  
Interval Shoot  
1 Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Interval  
1
0
0
min.  
Total Time  
Start Delay  
hr. 10min.  
2 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the interval, then press the  
4 button.  
hr.  
0min.  
MENU  
3
The frame returns to [Interval].  
5
6
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Total Time].  
Set the total time.  
1 Press the four-way controller (5).  
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the hours, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Total Time].  
7
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Start Delay].  
8
Set the start delay.  
1 Press the four-way controller (5).  
2 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the hours, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
3 Use the four-way controller (23) to set the minutes, then press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Start Delay].  
9
Press the 3 button.  
The Interval movie setting is saved and the camera returns to capture  
mode.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus frame on the display turns green if the subject is in focus.  
11 Press the shutter release button fully.  
Interval movie recording starts.  
The LCD turns off between shots (during standby). Press the power  
switch during standby to display the remaining time and interval on the  
monitor.  
The [Stop interval shooting?] message is displayed when the power  
switch and then the 3 button are pressed during standby.  
Pressing the 4 button cancels interval movie.  
3
Setting from Menu  
You can set the Interval Movie from [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Movie] screen appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Interval  
Movie  
Recorded Pixels  
Movie SR  
Shoot].  
Interval Shoot  
MENU  
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The interval movie setting screen appears. The rest of the procedure  
is the same as steps 4-11 in “Setting from Drive Mode”. See those  
procedures if you need more information.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Confirm that the battery is sufficiently charged before starting interval  
movie recording. If the battery is not sufficiently charged, it may  
become depleted during interval movie recording and cause recording  
of the movie to stop.  
• When performing interval movie shooting, the settings are fixed as  
follows; Recorded Pixels: V (1280×720), Quality Level: C, Movie  
SR: P (Off), and Flash Mode: a. However, shooting is done at a frame  
rate according to the recorded pixels (p.152) set on the Movie menu.  
• Interval Shoot stops if the SD Memory Card is removed or inserted  
during standby.  
• Sound cannot be recorded in Interval Movie mode.  
• When you use the SD Memory Card, use SD Speed Class 4 or higher  
cards.  
3
• If you set a start delay, a start time corresponding to the current time  
and the start delay you set is displayed in real time.  
• The total time you can set differs according to the shooting interval you  
set, as indicated in the table below.  
Total time that can be set  
Interval  
30 fps  
15 fps  
10 minutes to 5 hours and 59 10 minutes to 5 hours and 59  
1 min  
5 min  
minutes  
(in increments of 1 minute)  
minutes  
(in increments of 1 minute)  
30 minutes to 29 hours and 15 minutes to 29 hours and 55  
55 minutes minutes  
(in increments of 5 minutes) (in increments of 5 minutes)  
1 hour to 59 hours and 50 30 minutes to 59 hours and 50  
10 min  
minutes  
minutes  
(in increments of 10 minutes) (in increments of 10 minutes)  
3 hours to 179 hours and 30 1 hour and 30 minutes to 179  
30 min  
1 hr  
minutes  
hours and 30 minutes  
(in increments of 30 minutes) (in increments of 30 minutes)  
6 hours to 359 hours  
(in increments of 1 hour)  
3 hours to 359 hours  
(in increments of 1 hour)  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving the Settings (Memory)  
The Memory function is for saving the current camera settings when the  
camera is turned off.  
For some camera settings, the Memory function is always set to  
O
(On) (the  
settings are saved when the camera is turned off), while for others you can  
choose on or off (to choose whether the settings are saved or not when the  
camera is turned off). The items which can be set to On or Off in the Memory  
function are shown in the table below. (Items not listed here are always  
saved in the selected settings when the camera is turned off.)  
3
If you select  
O
(On), the settings will be saved in the status they were in  
(Off), the settings  
immediately before the camera was turned off. If you select  
P
will be reset to the defaults when the camera is turned off. The table below also  
shows whether the Memory default setting for each item is on or off.  
Default  
setting  
Item  
Face Detection  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
Description  
Page  
A Face Detection mode set by using the I  
P
button.  
The flash mode set with the four-way  
O
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
O
P
controller (4)  
The drive mode set with the four-way  
controller (2)  
The focus mode set with the four-way  
Focus Mode  
Zoom Position  
MF Position  
White Balance  
Sensitivity  
controller (5)  
The zoom position set with the w/x  
button.  
The manual focus position set with the four-  
way controller (23)  
The [White Balance] setting on the [A Rec.  
Mode] menu  
The [Sensitivity] setting on the [A Rec.  
Mode] menu  
The [EV Compensation] setting on the [A  
Rec. Mode] menu  
The [AE Metering] setting on the [A Rec.  
EV Compensation  
AE Metering  
Digital Zoom  
DISPLAY  
Mode] menu  
The [Digital Zoom] setting on the [A Rec.  
Mode] menu  
The display information display mode set  
with the 4/W button  
If a new SD Memory Card is inserted when  
On has been selected, file numbers are  
assigned sequentially.  
File No.  
O
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Memory].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Memory] screen appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to choose an item.  
Memory  
1/3  
Face Detection  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
3
Focus Mode  
Zoom Position  
MF Position  
MENU  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select  
O
(On) or  
P
(Off).  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to capture mode.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Playing Back and  
Deleting Images  
Playing Back Images ..............................162  
...................................................................183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing Back Images  
Playing Back Still Pictures  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
i button  
4
1
Press the Q button after  
taking a picture.  
File number  
-
100 0038  
The camera enters the Q mode and  
the image appears on the display.  
Displaying one image in full in Q mode  
(Q mode default setting) is called  
single-image display.  
Edit  
To Play Back the Previous or Next Image  
2
Press the four-way controller (45).  
The previous or next image appears.  
To Delete the Displayed Image  
Press the i button while the image is  
displayed to display the Delete screen.  
Press the four-way controller (2) to select  
[Delete] and press the 4 button.  
100-0017  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
For information on other deletion procedures 1p.176  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing Back a Movie  
You can play back the movies you have taken. The sound is played back  
at the same time.  
f/y button  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the movie you want to play back.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
-
100 0017  
00 : 30  
Playback starts.  
Edit  
The following operations can be performed during playback.  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (2)  
Zoom button (y)  
Zoom button (f)  
Press and hold the four-way controller (  
Plays back in reverse  
Pauses playback  
Increases the volume  
Reduces the volume  
Fast-forwards playback  
Fast-reverses playback  
5
4
)
)
Press and hold the four-way controller (  
The following operations can be performed while playback is  
paused.  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Four-way controller (2)  
Reverses the frame  
Forwards the frame  
Resumes playback  
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
Playback stops.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multi-Image Display  
f/y button  
Q button  
3 button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
6-Image Display/12-Image Display  
4
You can display 6 or 12 thumbnails of captured images at a time.  
1
Press the f button in Q mode.  
The 6-image display appears showing a page consisting of 6  
thumbnail images. Pressing the f button again changes it to a  
12-image display.  
A page consisting of 6 or 12 thumbnail  
images appears. The displayed  
1
images change 6- or 12-images at a  
time page by page.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345  
to move the frame. If there are too  
many images to fit on one page,  
pressing the four-way controller (24  
)
Select & Delete  
100-0010  
6-Image Display  
)
Folder divider icon  
while image  
the previous page. Similarly, if you  
choose image and press the four-  
1
is selected will display  
Frame  
2
1
way controller (35), the next page  
appears.  
indicates that the previous or next  
screen is stored in a separate folder.  
2
Select & Delete  
100-0010  
12-Image Display  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The icons that appear on the images indicate the following:  
(No icon)  
O (With image)  
C
Still picture without sound  
Still picture with sound  
Movie (the first frame appears)  
O (Without image) Sound files only  
Press the 4 button to switch to single-image display of the selected  
image.  
Press the Q button to switch to A mode.  
Folder Display/Calendar Display  
Press the f button in 12-image display to switch to folder or calendar  
display. Press the Green button to switch between folder display and  
calendar display.  
4
1
Press the f button twice in Q mode.  
The screen changes to 12-image display.  
2
Press the f button.  
The screen changes to folder display or calendar display.  
Folder display  
Frame  
The list of folders with recorded  
images and sound files appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345)  
to move the frame.  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
If you select a folder and press the y  
button or the 4 button, images in the  
folder are displayed in 12-image  
display.  
101_0707  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Calendar display  
Recorded images and sound files are  
displayed by date in calendar format.  
The first image recorded on a date is  
displayed for that date on the  
calendar.  
O appears for dates on which the first  
recorded file was either sound-only  
data or a still picture with a voice  
memo.  
Frame  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
2
9
3
4
65  
6
7
14  
21  
28  
8
15  
22  
29  
10  
17  
24  
31  
11  
18  
25  
12  
19  
26  
13  
20  
27  
16  
23  
30  
2011  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the frame.  
If you select a date and press the y button, images taken on that date  
are displayed in 12-image display.  
Select a date and press the 4 button to switch to single-image  
display of the first image recorded on that date.  
4
• Press the 3 button in folder display or calendar display to switch  
to 12-image display.  
• Press the Q button or half-press the shutter release button in folder  
display or calendar display to switch to A mode.  
Using the Playback Function  
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose an icon.  
The guide for the selected function  
appears below.  
Slideshow  
1/2  
For continuously playing  
back images. Screen or  
sound effects can be set  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
Press the 4 button.  
The playback function is recalled.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
-
100 0038  
Edit  
MENU  
Slideshow  
1/2  
Image Rotation  
1/2  
Rotates captured images.  
Useful when viewing  
For continuously playing  
back images. Screen or  
sound effects can be set  
4
vertical images on  
a
TV  
MENU  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
Cancel  
SHUTTER  
OK  
Press  
or  
halfway  
MENU  
OK  
38  
Cancel  
OK  
Closes the Playback Mode  
Palette and goes to A mode.  
Goes to the screen for  
selected playback function.  
• When the frame is placed over an icon on the Playback Mode Palette,  
a guide for that function appears.  
• You can turn the guide display off for the function on the Playback  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback Mode Palette  
Playback Mode  
Description  
Page  
For continuously playing back images. Screen or  
sound effects can be set  
Slideshow  
u
s
k
Rotates captured images. Useful when viewing  
vertical images on a TV  
Image Rotation  
Small Face Filter  
Ink Rubbing Filter  
Reduces the size of faces in the image, for well-  
proportioned portraits  
Creates an image similar to ink rubbing from  
original pictures  
Collage  
Creates a collage print page from saved image files p.198  
For modifying images with a Color filter or Soft filter p.192  
Digital Filter  
P
Available to make from the kind and color of a  
Original Frame  
E
frame. Available to enter text  
For composing an image with a frame. Select  
4
Frame Composite  
N
Overwrite or Save as to save  
Save as  
Still image  
For saving one frame from a movie as a still picture  
Movie Divide  
Editing Movies  
For dividing a movie into two  
[
Adding  
title picture  
For adding a title picture to your movie  
Red-eye  
Compensation  
For compensating red-eye. May not work due to  
the condition of the image  
Z
n
o
p
Changes Recorded Pixels and Quality Level to  
make the file size smaller  
Resize  
For cropping images to the size you like. Saved as  
a new image  
Cropping  
For copying images and sounds between the builtin  
memory and SD memory card  
Image/Sound Copy  
Voice Memo  
Protect  
Attaches sound to images. Recording is possible till  
the memory card is full  
\
Protects images and sounds from accidental  
deletion. Formatting will delete  
Z
r
For the print settings. Useful when printing at a  
printing service  
DPOF  
For setting a captured image as the Start-up  
Screen  
Start-up Screen  
^
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Slideshow  
You can play back recorded images and movies one after another.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image to start the slideshow with.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select  
Slideshow  
1/2  
u (Slideshow).  
For continuously playing  
back images. Screen or  
sound effects can be set  
4
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The slideshow setting screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Start].  
Slideshow starts  
Start  
Interval  
3sec.  
Wipe  
Screeen Effect  
Sound Effect  
MENU  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The slideshow starts.  
Pressing the 4 button during the slideshow pauses the slideshow.  
To resume the slideshow, press the 4 button again.  
Press any button other than the 4 button.  
The slideshow stops.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To Set the Slideshow Conditions  
You can set the playback interval and also a screen effect and sound  
effect for when one image changes to the next.  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Interval] in  
step 5 on p.169.  
Start  
Interval  
3sec.  
Wipe  
Screen Effect  
Sound Effect  
MENU  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the interval  
and press the 4 button.  
Choose from [3sec.], [5sec.], [10sec.], [20sec.] or [30sec.].  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Screen  
Effect].  
After selecting [Screen Effect], press the four-way controller (5). A  
pull-down menu appears with the following items. Use the four-way  
controller (23) to select an item and press the 4 button.  
Wipe  
The next image slides over the previous one from left to right  
The next image appears in small square mosaic blocks  
Checker  
The current image gradually fades out and the next image  
fades in  
Fade  
Random  
Off  
Various effects are used randomly  
No effect  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound  
Effect].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or  
P (Off).  
Except when the [Screen Effect] is set to Off, you can choose O (On)  
or P (Off) for the sound that is played when one image changes to the  
next.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start].  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The slideshow starts using the selected interval and effect.  
• The slideshow will continue until you press any button other than the  
4 button.  
• Movies or pictures with sound will be played through to the end before  
the next picture is played back, regardless of the interval setting.  
However, pressing the four-way controller (5) while playing back a  
movie or a picture with sound skips to the next image.  
• Sound files made in O (Voice Recording) are not played back in the  
slideshow.  
• Panorama images are displayed by scrolling from left to right in 4  
seconds before the next picture is played back, regardless of the  
Interval or Screen Effect setting.  
4
• When [Random] is selected for the screen effect, the interval is fixed  
and the sound effect is set to off. Also the sound of pictures with sound  
will not be played back.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotating the Image  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the Q button after taking a picture.  
The image appears on the display.  
4
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
s (Image Rotation) and press the 4 button.  
The rotation selection screen (0°, Right 90°, Left 90°, or 180°) appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose the  
rotation direction and press  
the 4 button.  
The rotated image is saved.  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
• Panoramic images and movies cannot be rotated.  
• Protected images can be rotated, but they cannot be saved in a rotated  
state.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zoom Playback  
You can magnify an image up to ten times.  
f/y button  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image you want to magnify.  
4
2
Press the y button.  
The image is magnified (×1.1 to ×10). Holding down the y button  
continuously magnifies the image.  
With Quick Zoom (p.251) set to O (On), pressing y once magnifies  
the image to 10×.  
You can use the + mark of the guide at  
the bottom left of the screen to check  
which portion of the image is  
magnified.  
The following operations can be  
performed while an image is  
Guide  
magnified.  
Four-way controller (2345) Moves the position to be magnified  
Zoom button right (y)  
Makes the image bigger (max. of 10×)  
Makes the image smaller (min. of 1.1×)  
Zoom button left (f)  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The image returns to single-image display.  
Movies cannot be magnified.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zoom In on the Subject’s Face Automatically  
(Face Close-up Playback)  
You can enjoy playing back images with the subject’s faces zoomed up  
simply by pressing the Ibutton (Face close-up playback) if the Face  
Detection function operated when the images were taken.  
f/y button  
Q button  
Ibutton  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
4
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image you want to magnify.  
2
Confirm that the Iicon is displayed in the image and  
press the Ibutton.  
The image is magnified around the  
1/2  
face first recognized when the image  
was taken.  
If multiple faces were recognized  
2/2  
when the image was taken, the  
subject’s faces are zoomed up on  
each time the Ibutton is pressed in  
order of the recognition during  
shooting.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The following operations can be performed during Face close-up  
playback mode.  
Zoom button right (y)  
Zooms up on the subject being displayed for  
Face close-up playback at an equal or slightly  
larger magnification ratio.  
Zoom button left (f)  
Zooms up on the subject being displayed for  
Face close-up playback at an equal or slightly  
smaller magnification ratio.  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The image returns to single-image display.  
• Face close-up playback is not available for images that are saved as  
still pictures from the movies.  
4
• The magnification ratio for Face close-up playback may differ  
depending on the conditions such as the size of the face recognized  
when shooting.  
• Face close-up playback is also available for pet’s faces recorded in  
e (Pet) mode.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Images and Sound Files  
Delete images and sound files that you do not want to keep.  
Deleting a Single Image/Sound File  
You can delete a single image or sound file.  
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.180).  
4
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
i button  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image/sound file you want to  
delete.  
2
3
Press the i button.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Delete].  
100-0017  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The image is deleted.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To Delete a Sound File  
If sound (voice memo) has been recorded with an image (p.226), you  
can delete the sound without deleting the image.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image with sound.  
U appears on the images with sound.  
2
3
Press the i button.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Delete Sound].  
100-0038  
4
Delete Sound  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The sound file is deleted.  
• Select [Delete] in step 3 to delete both the image and sound file.  
• You cannot delete only the sound in a movie.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Deleting Selected Images and Sound Files  
You can delete several images/sound files selected from the 6- or  
12-image display at once.  
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.180).  
f/y button  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
4
i button  
1
Press the f button once or twice in Q mode.  
6-image display or 12-image display appears.  
2
Press the i button.  
P appears on the images and sound  
files.  
OK  
MENU Cancel  
Delete  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose the  
images and sound files that  
you want to delete and press  
the 4 button.  
O appears on the selected images  
OK  
MENU Cancel  
Delete  
and sound files.  
Pressing and holding the y button displays the selected image in a  
single screen and you can check whether to delete the image.  
Releasing the button returns to 6- or 12-image display. However,  
protected images cannot be displayed in single-image display.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Press the i button.  
A confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Select & Delete].  
Delete alll selected  
images//sounds?  
Select & Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The selected images and sound files are deleted.  
4
Deleting All Images and Sound Files  
Deletes all the images and sound files at once.  
Protected images and sound files cannot be deleted (p.180).  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
4 button  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Delete All].  
Setting  
3/4  
5sec.  
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
3min.  
Delete All  
MENU  
Exit  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A confirmation dialog appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Delete All  
(2) to select [Delete All].  
Delete all  
images/sounds?  
4
Delete All  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
All the images and sound files are deleted.  
Protecting Images and Sound Files from Deletion  
(Protect)  
You can protect stored images and sound files from being accidentally  
deleted.  
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the image you want to protect.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select  
Protect  
2/2  
Z (Protect).  
Protects images and sounds  
from accidental deletion.  
Formatting will delete  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The screen for selecting [Single Image/Sound] or [All Images/Sounds]  
appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Single Image/  
Sound].  
Single Image/Sound  
All Imagess/Sounds  
Cancel  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The message [Protects this image/sound] appears.  
To protect another image or sound file, use the four-way controller  
(45) to select another image or sound file.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Protect].  
100-0038  
Protectts this  
image//sound  
Protect  
Unprotect  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The selected image or sound file is protected.  
To protect other images or sound files, repeat Steps 5 to 8.  
Select [Cancel] to exit the Protect settings.  
• To cancel the Protect setting, select [Unprotect] in step 7.  
Y appears on the protected images and sound files during playback.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To Protect All Images and Sound Files  
1
Select [All Images/Sounds] in  
step 5 on p.181.  
Single Imagee/Sound  
All Images/Sounds  
Cancel  
OK  
2
3
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Protect].  
Protects all  
images//sounds  
4
Protect  
Unprotect  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
All the images and sound files are protected and the screen shown in  
Step 1 reappears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Cancel] and  
press the 4 button.  
The Playback Mode Palette reappears.  
Protected images and sound files are deleted when the SD Memory  
Card or the built-in memory is formatted (p.230).  
To cancel the Protect setting on all your images and sound files, select  
[Unprotect] in step 3.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Camera to AV  
Equipment  
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video IN jack  
or HDMl terminal and playback images.  
• The power lamp on the camera lights up during a connection.  
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of  
the AC adapter kit K-AC117 (optional) is recommended. (p.43)  
• For AV equipment with multiple video IN jacks, check the operating  
manual of the AV device, and select the video IN jack to which the  
camera is connected.  
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.  
• The camera display turns off while the camera is connected to AV  
equipment.  
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera when connected to an  
AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.  
4
• When the camera is connected to an AV device, you can change the  
images with the remote control (optional).  
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack  
By using the supplied AV cable (I-AVC7), you can capture and play back  
images on equipment with a video IN jack, such as a TV.  
ExternalInput  
Terminal  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
(L)  
(R)  
Yellow  
White  
PC/AV terminal  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.  
2
Open the terminal cover.  
Move the terminal cover lock lever in the direction shown by 1, slide  
the cover in the direction shown by 2 and open the cover in the  
direction shown by 3.  
3
4
Connect the AV cable to the PC/AV terminal.  
Connect the other ends of the AV cable (yellow: video,  
white: audio) to the video input terminal and audio input  
terminal of the AV device.  
When using stereo sound equipment, insert the sound terminal into the  
L (white) terminal.  
4
5
6
Turn the AV device on.  
When the device that the camera is connected to and the device that  
plays back images are different, turn both devices on.  
When viewing images on AV equipment with multiple video input  
terminals (such as a TV), refer to the operation manual of the device  
and select the video input terminal to which to connect the camera.  
Turn the camera on.  
• Depending on the country or region, images and sound files may fail  
to be played back if the video output format is set different from the one  
in use there. If this happens, change the video output format setting  
(p.244).  
• The camera’s AV output is output at normal resolution.  
To watch movies shot at M or F at HDTV resolution, output the  
movies as HDMI or transfer them to a computer (p.185).  
Close the terminal cover securely when not using the terminal.  
<How to close the terminal cover>  
Close the cover in the opposite direction indicated by 3. While lightly  
pressing on the terminal cover, slide it away from 2 until it clicks.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal  
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a  
device with an HDMI terminal.  
HDMI  
terminal  
4
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.  
2
Open the terminal cover.  
Move the terminal cover lock lever in the direction shown by 1, slide  
the cover in the direction shown by 2 and open the cover in the  
direction shown by 3.  
3
4
Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI terminal.  
Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN  
jack on the AV device.  
5
Turn the AV device and camera on.  
The camera information is displayed on the screen of the connected  
AV device.  
• The camera has a Type D (Micro) HDMI terminal. Use a commercially  
available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.  
• If you playback the movie by connecting the camera to an AV device  
with a commercially available HDMI cable, set the output format to  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Close the terminal cover securely when not using the terminal.  
<How to close the terminal cover>  
Close the cover in the opposite direction indicated by 3. While lightly  
pressing on the terminal cover, slide it away from 2 until it clicks.  
4
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Editing and Printing  
Images  
Editing Images ........................................188  
About Printing  
You can print pictures taken with the camera in the following ways.  
1. Go to a photo processing lab  
2. Use a printer that has an SD Memory Card slot to print directly from the SD  
Memory Card  
3. Use the software that is available on your computer to print images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Images  
Changing the Image Size (Resize)  
By changing the size and quality of a selected image, you can make the  
file size smaller than the original. You can use this function to continue  
taking pictures when the SD Memory Card or the built-in memory is full,  
by making the images smaller and overwriting the original images to  
make more space available.  
• Images taken with the recorded pixels of j (3216×3216) or  
panoramic images and movies cannot be resized.  
• You cannot select a larger resolution and higher Quality Level than  
that of the original image.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image you want to resize.  
5
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select  
Resize  
1/2  
n (Resize).  
Changes Recorded Pixels  
and Quality Level to make  
the file size smaller  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The screen for choosing the image size appears.  
Select [Recorded Pixels] and  
[Quality Level].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the size and quality.  
Recorded Pixels  
14M  
Use the four-way controller (23) to  
switch between [Recorded Pixels] and  
[Quality Level].  
Quality Level  
U  
Cancel  
OK  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Overwrite  
originall image?  
Cancel  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The resized image is saved.  
Cropping Images  
5
You can delete the unwanted part of a picture and save the cropped  
image as a separate image.  
Images taken with the recorded pixels of j (3216×3216) or  
panoramic images and movies cannot be cropped.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image you want to crop.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select  
Cropping  
1/2  
o (Cropping).  
For cropping images to the  
size you like. Saved as  
new image  
a
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The cropping screen appears.  
The largest size of the cropped image is shown with a green frame on  
the screen. The cropped image cannot be larger than this cropping  
frame size.  
Choose the cropping area.  
The following operations move the  
green frame and set the area for  
cropping on the screen.  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Zoom button Changes the size of the  
(f/y)  
cropped section  
Four-way  
controller  
(2345)  
Moves the cropping position  
up, down, left and right  
Green Button Rotates the cropping frame  
• The button is only  
5
displayed when the  
cropping frame size can  
be rotated.  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The cropped image is saved with a new file name.  
The number of recorded pixels is selected automatically according to  
the size of the cropped section. The image is saved at the same quality  
level as the original.  
Processing Images to Make Faces Look Smaller  
Images are processed to reduce the size of people’s faces detected with  
the Face Detection function (p.80) when taking pictures so that they look  
smaller.  
1
In Q mode, use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the image you want to edit.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select k (Small  
Face Filter).  
Small Face Filter  
1/2  
Reduces the size of faces  
in the image, for well-  
proportioned portraits  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Face detection frames for faces that can be corrected are displayed.  
Proceed to Step 6 when there is only one detection frame.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a face to  
be processed.  
A green frame indicates the face that  
is to be processed.  
OK  
5
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to change the reduction  
ratio.  
F
G
H
Approx. 5%  
Approx. 7%  
Approx. 10%  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation dialog does not appear.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
Overwrite  
original image?  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to  
Q
mode and the processed image is displayed.  
You may not be able to process images in the following situations:  
• When the size of face taken in relation to an image is too large or too  
small  
• When faces are located in the edges of an image  
In such cases, the face detection frame in Step 4 will not appear.  
Using the Digital Filters  
This mode lets you change the color tones and perform special  
processing on a selected image.  
B&W/Sepia  
Changes color images to black and white or processes usnig the  
sepia filter.  
Toy Camera  
Retro  
Images seem to have been taken with a toy camera.  
5
Images have the feel of old photos with a white border. You can  
choose from three filters: Original image, amber, and blue.  
Color  
Processes the image using the selected color filter. You can choose  
from six filters: red, pink, purple, blue, green, and yellow.  
Extract Color  
Processes the image using the selected color extraction filter. You  
can choose from three filters: red, green, and blue.  
Color Emphasis There are 4 filters: Sky Blue/Fresh Green/Delicate Pink/Autumn  
Leaves.  
High Contrast  
Starburst  
Adjusts the contrast of the captured images.  
Processes the image with a special sparkling look achieved by  
adding cross-like effects to a highlighted area, such as town lights  
at night, light reflected from water, or other light sources. You can  
choose from three filters: Cross, Heart, and Star.  
Soft  
Processes the image into a soft image that appears soft overall.  
Applies a fish-eye lens effect to images.  
Fish-eye  
Brightness  
Miniature  
Adjusts the brightness of the image.  
Blurs part of the image to create a fake miniature scene.  
Panoramic images, movies or images taken with another camera cannot  
be edited using Digital Filter function. An error message appears if you  
choose this function from the Playback Mode Palette and press the 4  
button.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image you want to edit.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select P (Digital  
Digital Filter  
1/2  
Filter).  
For modifying images with  
a
Color filter or Soft  
filter  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The digital filter selection screen  
appears.  
B&W/Sepia  
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
1 B&W/Sepia  
2 Toy Camera  
3 Retro  
5
9
10  
11  
12  
U  
Cancel  
OK  
4 Color  
5 Extract Color  
6 Color Emphasis  
7 High Contrast  
8 Starburst  
9 Soft  
10 Fish-eye  
11 Brightness  
12 Miniature  
Subsequent steps vary depending on your selection.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Select a Soft Filter  
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a digital  
filter you want to use.  
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Overwrite  
originall image?  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
5
8
Press the 4 button.  
The images processed with the filter are saved.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Select a B&W/Sepia, Retro, Color, Extract Color, Color  
Emphasis or Starburst Filter  
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the digital  
filter you want to use.  
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.  
6
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the effect.  
Retro  
U  
Cancel  
OK  
Four-way controller  
Four-way controller  
Default Setting  
Original image  
(4)  
(5)  
Retro  
Blue  
Amber  
5
B&W/Sepia  
Color  
B&W Sepia  
Red Pink Purple Blue Green Yellow  
Extract Color  
Red Green Blue  
Color Emphasis Sky Blue Fresh Green Delicate Pink Autumn Leaves  
Starburst Cross Heart Star  
7
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
8
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Overwrite  
originall image?  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
9
Press the 4 button.  
The images processed with the filter are saved.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Select Toy Camera, High Contrast, Fish-eye, Brightness or  
Miniature Filter  
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a digital  
filter you want to use.  
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.  
6
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to adjust the effect.  
Toy Camera  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
Four-way controller  
Four-way controller  
Default Setting  
(4)  
(5)  
Toy Camera  
High Contrast  
Fish-eye  
Weak  
Weak  
Weak  
Dark  
Standard  
Standard  
Strong  
Strong  
Strong  
Bright  
Lower  
5
Standard  
Brightness  
Miniature  
Standard  
Upper  
Upper and lower  
7
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
8
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Overwrite  
originall image?  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
9
Press the 4 button.  
The images processed with the filter are saved.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Ink Rubbing Filter  
You can edit the image to look like an ink rubbing.  
The Ink Rubbing Filter cannot be used on the following images.  
• Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) or  
modes  
(Report)  
• Images that have recorded pixels of h, h, l, or m  
• Images taken with other cameras  
An error message appears in step 4.  
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose the image you want to edit.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Ink Rubbing Filter  
1/2  
5
(2345) to select  
(Ink  
Rubbing Filter).  
Creates an image similar  
to ink rubbing from  
original pictures  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The preview image of the results of the filter effect appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the effect.  
Ink Rubbing Filter  
You can adjust the effect in five levels.  
F
G
H
Weak  
Standard  
Strong  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
6
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
original image?  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The images processed with the filter are saved.  
• The processed images are saved with the recorded pixels of f/  
.
• When there is little contrast between the object and the background,  
the shape of the object may not be sharp depending on the conditions  
of the original image.  
Creating a Collage Image  
5
Make a collage image by placing captured images on a selected pattern.  
The collage function cannot be used on the following images.  
• Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) or  
modes  
(Report)  
• Images that have recorded pixels of l, or m  
• Image taken with other cameras  
An error message appears in step 4.  
1
Enter Q mode and press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select  
Collage  
1/2  
(Collage).  
Creates  
a
collage print  
page from saved image  
files  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Press the 4 button.  
The item selection screen appears.  
3
M
Recorded Pixels  
Layout  
Backgnd.  
Select image(s)  
Create an image  
MENU  
Selecting the Number of Recorded Pixels  
4
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the  
[Recorded Pixels].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to choose the recorded  
pixels.  
3
M
5
Recorded Pixels  
Layout  
Backgnd.  
Select image(s)  
You can choose from h or h.  
Create an image  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
7
Press the 4 button.  
Returns to the item selection screen.  
Selecting the Layout Pattern  
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the  
[Layout].  
9
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
3
M
Recorded Pixels  
Layout  
Backgnd.  
Select image(s)  
Create an image  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to choose the pattern  
of layout.  
You can choose from 3 patterns of layout (  
/
/
).  
11 Press the 4 button.  
Returns to the item selection screen.  
Selecting the Background  
12 Use the four-way controller (23) to choose  
[Backgnd.].  
13 Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
14 Use the four-way controller  
3
M
Recorded Pixels  
Layout  
Backgnd.  
Select image(s)  
(23) to choose the  
5
background.  
You can choose the white background  
Create an image  
or the black background.  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
15 Press the 4 button.  
Returns to the item selection screen.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laying Out the Image  
• The collage function cannot be used on the following images.  
- Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) or  
modes  
(Report)  
- Images that have recorded pixels of l, or m  
- Images taken with other cameras  
These images do not appear as selectable items.  
• If you select an image with a 16:9 aspect ratio, the black areas appear  
above and below the image.  
16 Use the four-way controller (23) to choose [Select  
image(s)].  
17 Press the four-way controller (5).  
The images to be selected appear.  
18 Use the four-way controller  
5
-
0/4  
100 0001  
(45) to choose the image to  
include and press the 4  
button.  
OK  
The selected image is placed in the  
highlighted area in the guide. The  
guide appears on the top left of the  
monitor.  
U  
Cancel  
Exit  
19 Repeat step 18 to lay out the rest images.  
20 Press the 9 button.  
Returns to the item selection screen.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving the Edited Image  
21 Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Create an  
image].  
3
M
Recorded Pixels  
Layout  
Backgnd.  
Select image(s)  
Create an image  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
22 Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for saving the image appears.  
23 Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Save].  
Save  
Cancel  
5
OK  
OK  
24 Press the 4 button.  
The edited image is saved.  
The quality level of the image is fixed at C (Best).  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Red-eye Compensation  
You can correct images where the flash has caused the subject to  
appear with red eyes.  
• The red-eye compensation function cannot be used on panoramic  
images, movies or on images where red eyes cannot be detected on  
the camera. An error message appears in step 4.  
• The red-eye compensation function can only be used with still pictures  
taken with this camera.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image you want to correct.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select Z (Red-  
Red-eye Compensation  
1/2  
5
eye Compensation).  
For compensating red-eye.  
May not work due to the  
condition of the image  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Overwrite  
originall image?  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The edited image is saved.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adding a Frame (Frame Composite)  
This function lets you add a decorative frame to still pictures. There are  
6 frames already stored in the camera. You can copy the optional frames  
from the CD-ROM (S-SW117) supplied with the camera.  
The frame composite function cannot be used on the following images.  
• Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) or  
modes  
(Report)  
• Images that have recorded pixels of l, or m  
An error message appears in step 4.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image to which you want to add a  
frame.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
5
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select N (Frame  
Frame Composite  
1/2  
Composite).  
For composing an image  
with  
a
frame. Select Over-  
write or Save as to save  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The 12-frame display of the frame selection screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose a frame.  
OK  
OK  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Press the y button.  
The selected frame appears in single-  
image display.  
You can choose another frame using  
either of the following operations.  
OK  
OK  
Four-way  
Press to choose a  
controller (45) different frame.  
Zoom button  
Press to return to the  
left (f)  
12-frame display of the  
frame selection screen,  
and thenperform step 5 to  
choose a different frame.  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The frame position and size  
adjustment screen appears.  
You can adjust the image using either  
of the following operations.  
5
Cancel  
OK  
Four-way  
controller  
(2345)  
Press to adjust the  
position of the image  
Zoom button  
(f/y)  
Press to make the image  
larger or smaller.  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation does not appear.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Overwrite  
originall image?  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button.  
The edited image is saved with the recorded pixels of  
h (2048×1536)/h (1920×1080).  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Optional Frames  
The optional frames are stored in the CD-ROM (S-SW117) supplied with the  
camera. To use these frames, copy them from the CD-ROM. These optional  
frames are deleted if the files on the built-in memory are deleted with a  
computer or if the built-in memory is formatted.  
To Copy Frames  
1
Remove the SD Memory Card from the camera.  
If you leave the SD Memory Card in the camera, the frames will be  
copied onto the card, not into the camera’s built-in memory.  
2
Connect the camera to the computer using the  
provided USB cable (I-USB7).  
Refer to “Connecting to a Computer” (p.257) for instructions on  
connecting the camera to a computer.  
3
When the device detection window opens, click  
[Cancel].  
5
4
5
6
Insert the CD-ROM (S-SW117) into the CD-ROM drive.  
When the installer window opens, click [EXIT].  
If there is not already a “FRAME” folder in the root  
directory of the camera (Removable Disk), create the  
folder.  
7
Copy the desired files from the FRAME folder in the  
root directory of the CD-ROM to the FRAME folder on  
the camera (Removable Disk).  
For information on working with files on your computer, refer to the  
instruction manual supplied with the computer.  
8
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer and  
camera.  
Refer to “Connecting to a Computer” (p.257) for instructions on  
disconnecting the camera from a computer.  
• Frames can be stored both in the built-in memory and on the SD Memory  
Cards, but using large numbers of frames may slow down processing times.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To Use a New Frame  
The frames downloaded from the PENTAX website or other source can  
be used for adding a frame to pictures.  
• Extract the downloaded frame and copy it to the FRAME folder in the  
built-in memory or the SD Memory Card.  
• The FRAME folder is created when the SD Memory Card is formatted  
with this camera.  
• For more information on downloading, refer to the PENTAX website.  
Overlaying Your Original Frame on an Image  
You can overlay your original frame (decorative frame) on an image. You  
can select the type and color of an original frame and its position.Text  
can also be entered.  
5
Frame  
Type of original  
Blur/Edge Composite  
frame  
F (All sides)/G (Upper and lower sides)/H (Right and left sides)/  
Frame Type  
I (Upper side)/J (Lower side)/K (Left side)/L (Right side)  
Color  
White/Gray/Black/Pink/Pumpkin/Dark red/Dark green  
Text Stamp  
Available  
characters  
A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9, Symbols  
M (Upper-left)/N (Upper-center)/O (Upper-right)/P (Lower-left)/  
Q (Lower-center)/R (Lower-right)  
Display Position  
Color  
White/Gray/Black/Pink/Pumpkin/Dark red/Dark green  
The Original Frame function cannot be used on images taken at  
F (Digital Panorama) or (Report) modes, images recorded with  
h/h/l/m in [Recorded Pixels], or movies. An error message  
appears in Step 4.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
In Q mode, use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the image you want to add a frame to.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select  
Original Frame  
1/2  
E (Original Frame).  
Available to make from the  
kind and color of  
a
frame.  
Available to enter text  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The original frame type selecting screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select an original  
frame type, and press the 4  
5
Blur  
Edge Composite  
Cancel  
button.  
The frame setting screen appears.  
OK  
OK  
6
7
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Frame Type],  
and press the four-way  
controller (5).  
Frame Type  
Color  
Text Stamp  
Position AAdjussttment  
OK  
MENU  
Save  
Cancel  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a frame type,  
and press the four-way controller (4).  
8
9
Set [Color] in the same way as in Steps 6 and 7.  
Adjust the position of the frame and image.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Text Stamp],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The Text Stamp screen appears.  
When you do not enter characters, proceed to Step 12.  
11 Set up the text stamp.  
Text Stamp  
A/a  
ABCDE FGH I J KLMNOPQRS TUVWXY Z  
For details, refer to “To Set Up Text  
(
)
[
]
@
< >  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
.
}
,
/
:
;
!
?
{
$
#
+ =  
%
Finish  
Delete One Character  
OK  
MENU  
Enter  
Cancel  
12 Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog for overwriting the image appears.  
If the selected image is protected, the processed image is saved as a  
new image and the following confirmation dialog does not appear.  
5
13 Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Overwrite] or  
Overwrite  
original image?  
[Save as].  
Overwrite  
Save as  
Cancel  
O
OK  
14 Press the 4 button.  
The edited image is saved with the recorded pixels of  
f (2592×1944)/  
(2592×1464).  
To Adjust the Position of the Frame and an Image  
1
Press the Green button.  
The frame position adjustment screen  
appears.  
Four-way controller Press to adjust the  
(2345)  
position of the frame  
U  
Cancel  
/
OK  
Zoom button right  
(y)  
Press to make the  
frame larger  
Zoom button left  
(f)  
Press to make the  
frame smaller  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
3
Press the Green button.  
The image position adjustment screen  
appears.  
Four-way controller Press to adjust the  
(2345)  
position of the image  
MU  
Cancel  
/
OK  
Zoom button right  
(y)  
Press to make the  
image larger  
Zoom button left  
(f)  
Press to make the  
image smaller  
Press the 4 button.  
The screen returns to the original screen.  
To Set Up Text Stamp  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a  
character and press the 4  
Text Stamp  
A/a  
5
ABCDE FGH I J KLMNOPQRS TUVWXY Z  
(
)
[
]
@
< >  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
.
}
,
/
:
;
!
?
{
$
#
+ =  
%
Finish  
FR I ENDS  
button.  
The selected character is input.  
Up to 52 characters can be input.  
Delete One Character  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
I
button  
Press to switch  
between upper and  
lower case  
Zoom button right  
(y)  
Press to move the  
cursor to the right  
Zoom button left  
(f)  
Press to move the  
cursor to the left  
Green button  
Press to delete the  
character  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Finish]  
and press the 4 button.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Display  
Position] and press the four-  
way controller (5).  
Enter on this condition  
F R I ENDS  
Display Position  
Color  
Preview  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the display  
position and press the four-way controller (4).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Color] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the color  
and press the four-way controller (4).  
5
To View the Preview Screen  
1
Press the Green button.  
The preview screen appears.  
F R I E ND S  
MENU  
2
3
Press the 3 button.  
The screen returns to the original screen.  
Press the 4 button.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Movies  
You can select a frame from the recorded movie to save as a still picture,  
divide a movie into two, or add a title picture to a movie.  
1
Enter the Q mode and use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the movie you want to edit.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [ (Movie  
Movie Editing  
1/2  
Editing).  
Clipping still image from  
movie, movie segmentation,  
and to add title picture  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
4
Press the 4 button.  
The Movie Editing selection screen  
appears.  
Save as Still Image  
Divide Movies  
Adding title picture  
Cancel  
OK  
To Save a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture  
5
Select [Save as Still Image] on the Movie Editing  
selection screen.  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The screen appears for selecting a frame to be saved as a still picture.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to choose the frame  
you want to save.  
100-0042  
00:06  
Select thhe image  
to save  
2
Plays or pauses the movie  
Stops the movie and returns to  
the first frame  
1
3
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Reverses the movie frame by frame  
Advances the movie frame by frame  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The selected frame is saved as a still picture.  
To Divide a Movie  
5
6
Select [Divide Movies] on the movie edit selection screen.  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The screen for choosing the dividing position appears.  
7
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to determine the  
dividing position.  
100-0042  
00:09  
Select immage for  
dividing position  
2
Plays or pauses the movie  
Stops the movie and returns to  
the first frame  
1
3
M
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Reverses the movie frame by frame  
Advances the movie frame by frame  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
A confirmation dialog appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Divide].  
Dividee at thiis posiition?  
Divide  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 Press the 4 button.  
The movie is divided at the specified position, the two portions are  
saved as new files, and the original one is deleted.  
The protected movies cannot be divided.  
To Add a Title Picture to a Movie  
5
6
7
Select [Adding title picture] on the movie edit selection  
screen.  
Press the 4 button.  
The screen appears for selecting a title picture.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose the desired  
title picture.  
5
Only images available for use with the title picture are displayed.  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
The screen appears for confirming the position of the title picture.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the position.  
Speciffy thee ppositiion of  
titlee pictture to add  
A
Adds the title picture to the  
beginning of the movie  
Adds the title picture to the  
end of the movie  
Cancel  
B
OK  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button.  
The selected picture is saved as the title picture.  
Protected movies cannot be added a title picture.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• When a title picture is added to the beginning of a movie: When the  
movie is played back, the still picture is played back for three seconds,  
and then the movie is played back. The still picture registered as title  
picture is used as the thumbnail of the movie.  
When a title picture is added to the end of a movie: When the movie is  
played back, the movie is played back, and then the still picture is  
played back for three seconds. The thumbnail of the movie is not  
changed by adding a title picture to the end of the movie.  
• Only a still image with the same aspect ratio as the movie can be set  
as the title picture.  
Copying Images and Sound Files  
You can copy images and sound files from the built-in memory to the SD  
Memory Card and vice versa. This function can only be selected when  
an SD Memory Card has been inserted in the camera.  
5
Make sure that the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the  
SD Memory Card.  
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select p (Image/  
Image/Sound Copy  
2/2  
Sound Copy).  
For copying images and  
sounds between the builtin  
memory and SD memory card  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The copying method selection screen appears.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To Copy Files from the Built-in Memory to the SD Memory Card  
All the images and sound files in the built-in memory are copied to the  
SD Memory Card at once. Before copying the images, make sure that  
there is enough space on the SD Memory Card.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [2}{].  
SD  
SD  
Cancel  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
All the images and sound files are copied to the SD Memory Card.  
To Copy Files from the SD Memory Card to the Built-in Memory  
5
Selected images and sound files from the SD Memory Card are copied  
to the built-in memory one at a time.  
4
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [{}2].  
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller  
-
100 0017  
(45) to select the image/  
Copies this image/sound  
sound file you want to copy.  
U  
OK  
Cancel  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The selected image/sound file is copied to the built-in memory.  
To copy other images or sound files, repeat Steps 4 to 7. Select  
[Cancel] to exit the settings.  
• If sound (Voice Memo) has been recorded with the image, the sound  
file is copied with the image.  
• When a file is copied from the SD Memory Card to the built-in memory,  
it is assigned a new file name.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Printing Service (DPOF)  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is the format for storing print order  
data on still pictures captured with a digital camera. Once the print order  
data has been stored, the pictures can be printed according to the DPOF  
settings using a DPOF-compatible printer or photo processing lab.  
DPOF cannot be set for movies or sound-only files.  
If the picture already has the date and/or time imprinted on it (p.145), do  
not set [Date] O (On) in DPOF settings. If you select O (On), the  
imprinted date and/or time may overlap.  
Printing a Single Image  
Set the following items for each image.  
5
Copies For setting the number of prints. You can print up to 99 copies.  
Date Specify whether you want the date inserted on the print or not.  
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select r (DPOF).  
DPOF  
2/2  
For the print settings.  
Useful when printing at  
printing service  
a
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The screen for selecting [Single Image] or [All Images] appears.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4
5
6
7
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Single Image].  
Single Image  
All Images  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The message [Applies DPOF settings to this image] appears.  
To make DPOF settings for another image, use the four-way controller  
(45) to select another image.  
If DPOF settings have already been made for an image, the previous  
number of copies and date setting (  
O
(On) or  
P
(Off)) will be displayed.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to choose the number of  
copies.  
100-0017  
Applies DPOFF settings  
to this iimage  
5
Copies  
Date  
00  
Date  
M
OK  
Cancel  
Use the Green button to  
choose whether to insert the  
date or not.  
O(On) The date will be imprinted.  
P (Off) The date will not be  
imprinted.  
100-0017  
Applies DPOFF settings  
to this iimage  
Copies  
Date  
01  
Date  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
To continue setting DPOF print order data, use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose another image and repeat steps 6 and 7.  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved and the screen shown in Step 4 reappears.  
Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing  
lab, the date may not be imprinted on the pictures even if On is selected  
in the DPOF settings.  
To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in step 6 and  
press the 4 button.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing All Images  
When you choose the number of copies and whether or not to insert the  
date, the settings are applied to all the images stored in the camera.  
1
Select [All Images] in step 4 on p.218.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The message [Applies DPOF settings to all images] appears.  
3
Choose the number of copies  
and whether to insert the date  
or not.  
Refer to steps 6 and 7 in “Printing a  
Single Image” (p.218) for details of  
how to make the settings.  
Applies DPOFF settings  
to all iimages  
Copies  
Date  
01  
Date  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The settings for all the images are saved and the camera returns to the  
5
DPOF setting screen.  
• The number of copies specified in the DPOF settings applies to all the  
images. Before printing, check that the number is correct.  
• Settings for single images are canceled when settings are made with  
[All Images].  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memo  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Recording and  
Playing Back Sound  
...................................................................222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recording Sound (Voice Recording  
Mode)  
You can record sound with the camera. The microphone is located on  
front of the camera. When recording sound, aim the microphone at the  
sound source to obtain the best sound quality.  
Microphone/  
Speaker  
Setting Voice Recording  
To use the Voice Recording function, register Voice Recording to the  
Green Button.  
When the shooting mode is set to 9 (Green) Mode, [Green Button]  
settings cannot be configured on the [A Rec. Mode] menu. To configure  
the settings, first switch to a mode other than 9.  
6
1
Press the 3 button in A mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode] menu appears.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [Green Button].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Voice  
Recording] and press the 4  
Green Button  
Green Mode  
Voice Recording  
Movie  
Fn Setting  
button.  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
Press the 3 button.  
The Voice Recording function is registered to the Green Button.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recording Sounds  
Shutter release  
button  
Green Button  
1
Press the Green button in A  
mode.  
2
1
01:31:44  
The camera enters Voice Recording  
mode. The remaining recordable time  
and the recording time of the current  
file appear on the display.  
1 Recording time  
00:00:00  
HUTTER  
Start  
2 Remaining recordable time  
6
2
3
Press the shutter release  
button fully.  
01:30R:3EC2  
Recording starts. The self-timer lamp  
and REC icon (red) flash during  
recording.  
When the Green button is pressed  
during recording, an index is added to  
the current sound file.  
00:01:22  
Index  
SHUTTER  
Stop  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Recording stops.  
• If you press and hold down the shutter release button for more than  
one second in step 2, recording continues until you take your finger off  
the button. This is useful for recording short sounds.  
• Sound is saved in WAVE monaural files.  
• In O (Voice Recording) mode, pressing the 4/W button only  
turns off the LCD and changes the display to Normal Display.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing Back Sound  
You can play back the sound files you made with Voice Recording.  
f/y button  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
1
Press the Q button.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a sound  
file to play back.  
1
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
2
-
100 0025  
Playback starts.  
6
1 Total file recording time  
2 Playback time  
00:00:00  
00:01:30  
02/02/'10 14:25  
The following operations can be performed during playback.  
Four-way controller (2)  
Zoom button (y)  
Zoom button (f)  
Pauses playback  
Increases the volume  
Reduces the volume  
If there are no recorded indexes:  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
If there are recorded indexes:  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Reverses playback  
Fast forwards playback  
Plays back starting from the previous index  
Plays back starting from the next index  
The following operations can be performed while playback is paused.  
Four-way controller (2)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Resumes playback  
Rewinds approx. 5 seconds  
Advances approx. 5 seconds  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Press the four-way controller (3).  
Playback stops.  
6
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding a Voice Memo to Images  
You can add a voice memo to your still pictures.  
Recording a Voice Memo  
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the still picture to which you want to add a voice  
memo.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select \ (Voice  
Voice Memo  
2/2  
Memo).  
Attaches sound to images.  
Recording is possible till  
the memory card is full  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
6
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Recording starts.  
-
100 0038  
01:31:44  
Press the 4 button.  
Recording stops.  
• A voice memo cannot be added to the image that already has a voice  
memo. Delete the old voice memo (p.177) and record a new one.  
• A voice memo cannot be added to protected images (p.180).  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing Back a Voice Memo  
f/y button  
Q button  
Four-way controller  
1
Enter Q mode and use the four-way controller (45) to  
choose the still picture with the voice memo that you  
want to play back.  
U appears on images with voice memos in single-image display.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
-
100 0038  
Playback starts.  
6
Edit  
The following operations can be performed during playback.  
Zoom button (y)  
Zoom button (f)  
Increases the volume  
Reduces the volume  
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
Playback stops.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Memo  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Settings  
Camera Settings ......................................230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Camera Settings  
Formatting the Memory  
Formatting deletes all the data on the SD Memory Card or the built-in  
memory.  
Be sure to use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that  
is unused or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.  
• Do not remove an SD Memory Card while it is being formatted. This  
may damage the card and make it unusable.  
• Formatting deletes protected images and any data recorded on the  
card with a computer or any camera.  
• SD Memory Cards formatted on a computer or device other than this  
camera cannot be used. Be sure to format the card with the camera.  
• To format the built-in memory, be sure to eject the SD Memory Card  
beforehand. Otherwise, the SD Memory Card will be formatted.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
7
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Format].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Format] screen appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Format].  
Format  
All data will be deleted  
Format  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
Formatting starts.  
When formatting is completed, the camera returns to A mode or Q  
mode.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing the Sound Settings  
You can adjust the volume of operation sounds and change the type of sound.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound].  
Press the four-way controller  
Sound  
(5).  
Operation Volume  
Playback Volume  
The [Sound] screen appears.  
Start-up Sound  
Shutter Sound  
Operation Sound  
Self-timer Sound  
1
1
1
1
MENU  
To Change the Operation Volume/Playback Volume  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Operation Volume].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the volume.  
Set the volume to f to mute the start-up sound, shutter sound,  
operation sound, and self-timer sound.  
7
6
Change [Playback Volume] in the same way as in steps  
4 and 5.  
To Change the Sound Type  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start-up Sound].  
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the sound type.  
Choose from [1], [2], [3], [4], [Off], or [USER].  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
7
Press the 4 button.  
8
Set [Shutter Sound], [Operation Sound] and [Self-timer  
Sound] in the same way as in steps 4 to 7.  
9
Press the 3 button.  
The screen returns to the [W Setting] menu.  
Changing the Sound (Using a Recorded Sound File)  
You can use a sound recorded by the camera for sound settings.  
The first two seconds of the selected sound file will be played as the  
[USER] sound.  
1
Select [USER] in step 6 in “To Change the Sound Type”.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The playback screen for the recorded  
-
100 0038  
sound files appears.  
U  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select a sound file.  
Play back the selected file to confirm.  
7
Four-way controller (2): Plays back the first two seconds of the sound file.  
Four-way controller (3): Stops playback.  
4
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The selected sound is set as the [USER] sound.  
Set [Shutter sound], [Operation Sound] and [Self-timer  
Sound] in the same manner.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen returns to the [W Setting] menu.  
The Sound settings are saved when the camera is turned off.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Date and Time  
You can change the initial date and time settings (p.55). You can also  
set the style in which the date appears on the camera.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Date  
Adjustment].  
Press the four-way controller  
Date Adjustment  
(5).  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
The [Date Adjustment] screen  
appears.  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].  
Depending on the initial setting or previous setting, [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/  
mm/dd] may be displayed.  
7
Use the four-way controller  
Date Adjustment  
(23) to choose the date and  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
time display style.  
Choose from [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy]  
or [yy/mm/dd].  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
6
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [24h].  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [24h] (24-hour  
display) or [12h] (12-hour  
display).  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Date  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
8
9
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Date Format].  
Press the four-way controller  
(3).  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Date  
Time  
The frame moves to [Date].  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
10 Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to one of the following items depending on the date  
style set in step 5.  
Month for [mm/dd/yy]  
Day for [dd/mm/yy]  
Year for [yy/mm/dd]  
The following operations and screens use [mm/dd/yy] as an example.  
The operations are the same even if another date style has been  
selected.  
7
11 Use the four-way controller  
Date Adjustment  
(23) to change the month.  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
12 Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to the day field. Use the four-way controller (23) to  
change the day. After changing the day, change the year in the same  
manner.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 Change the time in the same way as in steps 8 to 12.  
If you selected [12h] in step 7, the setting switches between am and  
pm corresponding to the time.  
14 Press the four-way controller  
Date Adjustment  
(3) to select [Settings  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy 24  
01/01/2011  
00:00  
h
complete].  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
15 Press the 4 button.  
The date and time settings are saved and the screen returns to the  
[W Setting] menu.  
When you press the 4 button in step 15, the camera clock is reset to  
00 seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time  
signal (on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.  
Setting the Alarm  
You can set the alarm to ring at a specified time.  
You can choose whether the alarm will ring at the same time every day  
or only once at the set time.  
7
Setting the Alarm  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Alarm].  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Alarm  
Alarm  
14:14  
Off  
The Alarm screen appears.  
Time  
00:00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the alarm.  
Choose from [Off], [Once], or [Everyday].  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to the [Time] field.  
8
9
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to the hour field.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the hour,  
then press (5).  
The frame moves to the minute field.  
Change the minutes in the same manner.  
7
10 Press the 4 button.  
11 Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Settings complete].  
12 Press the 4 button.  
When the alarm is set to [Off], the  
settings are saved and the screen  
returns to the [W Setting] menu.  
Check that [Alarm] is set to P (Off).  
When the alarm is set to [Once] or  
[Everyday], [Alarm is set] is displayed  
and the power turns off.  
Setting  
Sound  
Date Adjustment  
Alarm  
World Time  
Text Size  
1/4  
01/01/2011  
Standard  
English  
MENU  
Exit  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the Alarm  
1
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Alarm] on  
the [W Setting] menu.  
Check that [Alarm] is set to O (On).  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
The Alarm screen appears.  
Alarm  
Alarm  
14:14  
Once  
14:25  
Time  
Check the alarm frequency and time.  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
3
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.  
Turning the Alarm Off  
The Clock mode screen appears and the  
alarm rings for one minute when the set  
time is reached while the camera is turned  
off.  
WED  
You can stop the alarm by pressing any  
button on the camera while the alarm is  
ringing.  
7
• The alarm will not ring if the camera is on when the set time is reached.  
• Even if an alarm is set, the alarm will not ring while interval shooting is  
being performed.  
Setting the World Time  
The date and time selected in “Setting the Date and Time” (p.55) and  
and time. By using the world time function, you can display the time in a  
city other than the Hometown (X Destination). This is useful when  
taking pictures in a different time zone.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To Set the Destination  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [World  
Time].  
Press the four-way controller  
World Time  
(5).  
Select Time  
DST  
OFF  
Destination  
New York  
The [World Time] screen appears.  
14:25  
DST  
14:25  
Hometown  
New York  
OFF  
MENU  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select  
X (Destination).  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Destination] screen appears. The city that is currently selected  
blinks on the map.  
7
6
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to change the  
14:25  
Destination  
Destination city.  
The current time, location and time  
difference of the selected city appear.  
City  
DST  
New York  
TimeDif.  
+
0:00  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [DST].  
8
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or  
P (Off).  
Select O (On) if the Destination city uses daylight saving time.  
9
Press the 4 button.  
The [World Time] setting is saved.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.  
Select W (Hometown) in step 4 to set the city and DST setting for the  
Hometown city.  
To Display the Time of the Destination (Select Time)  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [World  
Time].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [World Time] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
World Time  
(23) to select [Select Time].  
Select Time  
DST  
OFF  
Destination  
London  
19:25  
DST  
14:25  
Hometown  
New York  
OFF  
7
MENU  
5
6
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select  
World Time  
Select Time  
DST  
OFF  
Destination  
London  
X (Destination) or  
W (Hometown).  
19:25  
DST  
Hometown  
New York  
OFF  
14:25  
X
Displays the time of the  
Destination city  
MENU  
OK  
Cancel  
OK  
W
Displays the time of the  
Hometown city  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
8
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q  
mode.  
P
When X (Destination) is selected in  
step 6, the X icon appears on the  
display to indicate that the destination  
date and time are displayed in A  
mode.  
38  
Setting the Text Size on the Menu  
You can set the text size of the item selected with the cursor on the menu  
to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Text Size].  
7
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the text size.  
Select from [Standard] or [Large].  
Setting  
Sound  
Date Adjustment  
Alarm  
World Time  
Text Size  
1/4  
01/01/2011  
Standard  
Large  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Exit  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Display Language  
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed.  
The camera supports the following languages: English, French,  
German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Japanese, Danish,  
Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian,  
Thai, Korean, and Chinese (traditional and simplified).  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Language/  
].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Language/  
] screen appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the  
language.  
7
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The menus and messages are displayed in the selected language.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the System for Naming Folders  
You can change the system for naming the folders for storing images.  
When the naming system is set to the date, pictures are saved in  
separate folders by the date they were taken.  
Choice  
The name of the folder  
xxx_mmdd (3-digit folder number_month day)  
* xxx_ddmm (3-digit folder number_day month) when the date format is  
set to [dd/mm/yy]  
A folder is made by day, and the images and sound files of the day are  
saved in the folder.  
Date  
(Default)  
xxxPENTX (xxx is the 3-digit folder number)  
Up to 9999 images are saved in the same folder.  
PENTX  
xxxAAAAA (xxx is the automatically given 3-digit folder number, and  
_USER AAAAA is the 5-digit letters that you entered)  
Up to 9999 images are saved in the same folder.  
Image taken on April 8 Image taken on April 10 Image taken on April 15  
Image taken on April 1  
with the folder name  
setting set to [Date]  
created.  
with the folder name  
setting set to [Date]  
created.  
with the folder name  
setting set to [PENTX] setting set to [PENTX]  
created. created.  
with the folder name  
A folder with the name A folder with the name A new folder is not  
“100_0408” is created. “102PENTX” is created. created.  
A folder with the name  
“100_0401” is created.  
The images aresaved in Theimages are savedin Theimages are savedin  
the “100_0408” folder. the “102PENTX” folder. the “102PENTX” folder.  
The images are saved in  
the “100_0401” folder.  
DCIM  
DCIM  
DCIM  
DCIM  
7
100  
100  
100  
100  
100_0401  
100_0401  
100_0401  
100_0401  
101  
101  
101  
101_0408  
101_0408  
101_0408  
Up to 900 folders can be created.  
Up to 9999 images or sounds can be saved in a  
folder.  
102  
102  
102PENTX  
102PENTX  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting a Rule for Naming Folders  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Folder  
Name].  
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Setting  
2/4  
Date  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
PENTX  
_
USER  
Auto  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Brightness Level  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the rule for  
naming folders.  
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
7
Naming the Folder Yourself  
You can name the folder in which to save images.  
You can enter up to five numbers and letters.  
The 5-digit name is displayed after the 3-digit folder number.  
1
Select [_USER] in step 4 in “Selecting the Rule for  
Naming Folders”.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
The folder naming screen appears.  
Folder Name  
A
N
0
B
O
1
C
P
2
D
Q
3
E
R
4
F
S
5
G
T
6
H
U
7
I
V
8
J
W
9
K
X
L
Y
M
Z
Settings complete  
“_USER” has already been entered.  
U
S
E
R
OK  
MENU  
Enter  
Cancel  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the  
letter to enter, and press the 4 button.  
The first letter is fixed and the cursor moves to the second letter.  
4
5
Repeat step 3 and enter the remaining letters.  
Press the four-way controller  
Folder Name  
A
N
0
B
O
1
C
P
2
D
Q
3
E
R
4
F
S
5
G
T
H
U
7
I
J
W
9
K
X
L
Y
M
Z
(4) while “A” is selected, or  
press (35) while “_” is  
V
8
6
Settings complete  
selected.  
P
A
R
T
Y
The frame moves to [Settings  
complete].  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
6
Press the 4 button twice.  
The folder name is fixed, and returns to the [W Setting] menu.  
• You can move the cursor by pressing the zoom button.  
• The name of the folder that was set is displayed in the [R Setting]  
menu.  
Changing the Video Output Format  
7
When you connect the camera to AV equipment, choose the appropriate  
video output format (NTSC or PAL) for taking and playing back images.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Video Out].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a video output  
format.  
Choose the video output format to  
match the output format of the AV  
equipment.  
Setting  
2/4  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Date  
MSC  
NTSC  
PAL  
Brightness Level  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Depending on the country or region, images and sound files may fail to  
be played back if the video output format is set differently from the one  
in use there. If this happens, change the video output format setting.  
Video Output Format by City 1p.296  
Selecting the HDMI Output Format  
When you connect the camera to AV equipment with an HDMI cable, set  
the appropriate video output resolution for playing back images. The  
default setting is [Auto].  
7
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [HDMI Out].  
Press the four-way controller  
Setting  
2/4  
(5).  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Date  
MSC  
Auto  
A pull-down menu appears.  
1080i  
720p  
480p  
Brightness Level  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select an output  
format.  
Choose the HDMI output format to match the output format of the AV  
equipment.  
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
The items on the pull-down menu vary depending on the selected Video  
output format.  
To change the display, set the Video output format before setting the  
HDMI output format.  
The table below shows the combinations of the Video output format and  
HDMI output.  
Video output format  
NTSC  
PAL  
Auto (The largest size that both the TV and  
camera support is automatically selected)  
1080i (1920×1080i)  
720p (1280×720p)  
Resolution  
480p (1920×1080i)  
576p (720×576p)  
7
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Eye-Fi Communication  
You can automatically transfer images or movies to a computer or similar  
devices via wireless LAN using a commercially available Eye-Fi card.  
For details on transferring images, refer to “Transferring Images Using  
an Eye-Fi Card” (p.280). The default setting is P (Off).  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Eye-Fi].  
Use the four-way controller  
Setting  
2/4  
(45) to select O or P.  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Date  
MSC  
NTSC  
Auto  
O
Turns on communication  
using an Eye-Fi card  
Turns off communication  
using an Eye-Fi card  
Brightness Level  
P
MENU  
Exit  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
7
To establish an Eye-Fi communication, you first have to specify a  
wireless LAN access point and transfer destination on the Eye-Fi card.  
For details on how to set up the card, refer to the operating manual  
supplied with the Eye-Fi card.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display  
You can adjust the brightness of the display to 7 levels.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Brightness  
Level].  
Use the four-way controller  
Setting  
2/4  
(45) to adjust the  
brightness.  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
Date  
MSC  
NTSC  
Auto  
HDMI Out  
F
G
H
Dark  
Normal  
Bright  
Eye-Fi  
Brightness Level  
MENU  
Exit  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.  
The display appears with the set brightness.  
7
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Power Saving Function  
You can save battery power by setting the display to dim automatically  
when no operation is performed for a fixed time. After the power saving  
function has been activated, the display returns to the ordinary  
brightness if any button is pressed.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Power  
Saving].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the time until  
the camera enters power  
saving mode.  
Setting  
3/4  
min.  
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
2
1
min.  
30  
15  
sec.  
sec.  
5
sec.  
Off  
Delete All  
Choose from [2min.], [1min.], [30sec.],  
[15sec.], [5sec.] or [Off].  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
7
5
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
• Power Saving does not function in the following situations:  
- While taking pictures in the continuous shooting mode  
- In the playback mode  
- During movie recording  
- While the camera is connected to a computer  
- When using the AC adapter  
- While a menu is being displayed  
- In the  
(Digital Microscope) mode  
• When no operation is performed after the camera is turned on, Power  
Saving is activated only after 15 seconds elapse even if [5sec.] is set.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting Auto Power Off  
You can set the camera to turn off automatically when no operation is  
performed for a fixed time.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Power  
Off].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the time until  
the camera turns off  
Setting  
3/4  
sec.  
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
5
5
3
min.  
min.  
Off  
automatically.  
Delete All  
Choose from [5min.], [3min.] or [Off].  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
7
Auto Power Off does not function in the following situations:  
• While taking pictures in the continuous shooting mode  
• While recording a movie  
• During a slideshow or movie/sound playback  
• While the camera is connected to a computer  
• While recording sound in Voice Recording mode  
• While images are being transferred in Eye-Fi communication.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Quick Zoom Function  
While playing back images in Q mode, you can set whether to use  
Quick Zoom to enlarge the playback image to 10× when pressing the y  
button once.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quick  
Zoom].  
Use the four-way controller  
Setting  
3/4  
5sec.  
(
45) to switch between  
O
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
3min.  
(On) or (Off).  
P
O (On) The Quick Zoom is  
available.  
P (Off) The Quick Zoom is not  
Delete All  
MENU  
Exit  
available.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.  
7
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Guide Display  
Set whether to display the guide for the Capture Mode Palette or  
Playback Mode Palette.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Guide  
Display].  
Use the four-way controller  
Setting  
3/4  
5sec.  
(
45) to switch between  
O
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
3min.  
(On) or (Off).  
P
O (On) The mode guides are  
displayed.  
P (Off) The mode guides are not  
displayed.  
Delete All  
MENU  
Exit  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.  
7
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Perform Pixel Mapping  
Pixel mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting for defective  
pixels in the CCD sensor. Run the Pixel Mapping function if image dots  
always seem to be defective in the same place.  
• Pixel Mapping is only available in A mode. Pixel mapping cannot be  
selected even if the [W Setting] menu is displayed by pressing the  
3 button in Q mode.  
• When executing Pixel Mapping from Q mode, press the Q button  
once to enter A mode. Then press the 3 button and the four-  
way controller (5) to display the [W Setting] menu and select Pixel  
Mapping.  
• Pixel Mapping cannot be selected in Voice Recording mode.  
1
Press the 3 button in A mode, and then press the  
four-way controller (5) once.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Pixel  
Mapping].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.  
7
Use the four-way controller  
Pixel Mapping  
(2) to select [Pixel Mapping].  
Checks the image sensor  
and corrects defective  
pixels  
Pixel Mapping  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
Defective pixels are mapped and corrected.  
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to  
activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter  
kit K-AC117 (optional) or use a battery with ample capacity remaining.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Start-up Screen  
You can choose the start-up screen displayed when the camera is turned on.  
You can choose any of the following images as the start-up screen:  
• The Guide Display Start-up Screen showing a guide to the shooting  
modes and buttons  
• One of the 3 pre-installed screens  
• One of your own images (compatible images only)  
1
In Q mode, press the four-way controller (3).  
The Playback Mode Palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select ^ (Start-  
Start-up Screen  
2/2  
up Screen).  
For setting  
a
captured  
image as the Start-up  
Screen  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The image selection screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to choose the image for  
-
100 0017  
7
the start-up screen.  
Only images suitable for the start-up  
screen are displayed. You can also  
choose one of the 3 pre-installed  
screens or the Guide Display Start-up  
Screen already stored in the camera.  
U  
Cancel  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Once the start-up screen has been set, it is not being deleted even if  
the original image is deleted or the SD Memory Card or built-in memory  
is formatted. However the image is deleted if you change the start-up  
screen after deleting the recorded image or formatting the memory.  
• Select [Off] to hide the start-up screen.  
• The start-up screen is not displayed when you turn the camera on in  
the playback mode.  
• Movies or images taken at F (Digital Panorama) mode cannot be  
used for the start-up screen.  
Resetting to Default Settings (Reset)  
You can reset the camera settings to their defaults. Refer to “Default  
Settings” (p.291) for the reset settings.  
1
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset] screen appears.  
7
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2) to select [Reset].  
Reset  
Returns to default  
settings  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The settings return to the defaults.  
The following settings are not affected by resetting:  
• Date Adjustment  
• World Time  
• Language/  
• Video Out  
• The folder name that you created  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Displaying the Clock Mode  
You can use the camera as a clock. With the camera turned off, press  
and hold down the 4 button to display the clock on the display.  
4 button  
1
Press and hold down the 4  
button.  
The camera turns on and the clock  
appears on the screen.  
WED  
The camera turns off automatically  
after approximately 10 seconds.  
Pressing the power switch turns the  
camera off immediately.  
7
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8 Connecting to a  
Computer  
Setting Up Your Computer .....................258  
Card ..........................................................280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Up Your Computer  
By installing the software included on the provided CD-ROM on your  
computer and connecting the camera to your computer with the USB  
cable, you can transfer images and movies captured with your camera  
to the computer and then display and manage them. This section  
explains how to install the provided software and the other necessary  
preparations for enjoying the captured pictures and movies on your  
computer.  
Provided Software  
The following software is included in the provided CD-ROM (S-SW117).  
Windows  
Image viewing/managing/editing software “MediaImpression 3.0  
for PENTAX”  
(Applicable languages: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Russian, Chinese [traditional and  
simplified], Korean, and Japanese)  
Macintosh  
Image viewing/managing/editing software “MediaImpression 2.1  
for PENTAX”  
(Applicable languages: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Russian, Chinese [traditional and  
simplified], Korean, and Japanese)  
8
It is recommended to use the optional AC adapter kit K-AC117 when the  
camera is connected to a computer (p.43). If the battery runs out of  
power while images are being transmitted to a computer, the data may  
be lost or damaged.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Requirements  
The following system requirements must be met for you to fully enjoy the  
images and movies captured with the camera on your computer.  
Windows  
OS  
Windows XP SP3, Windows Vista or Windows 7  
• The OS must be preinstalled and updated to the latest  
version.  
CPU  
Pentium 4 1.6 GHz or equivalent AMD Athlon (Intel Core 2 Duo  
2.0 GHz or equivalent AMD Athlon X2 processor or above  
recommended)  
Memory  
512 MB minimum (1 GB or more recommended)  
300 MB minimum  
Hard Disk Space  
Monitor  
1024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color monitor or higher  
Others  
CD-ROM drive  
USB port as standard equipment  
* Operation is not guaranteed on all computers meeting the system requirements.  
* The system requirements describe the minimum environment for playing movies.  
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows  
NT/Windows 2000 are not supported.  
Macintosh  
OS  
Mac OS X (Ver.10.3.9, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6)  
• The OS must be preinstalled and updated to the latest  
version.  
8
CPU  
PowerPC G4 800 MHz processor or equivalent (Intel Core Duo  
processor or above recommended)  
Memory  
512 MB minimum (1 GB or more recommended)  
300 MB minimum (1 GB or more recommended)  
1024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color monitor or higher  
Hard Disk Space  
Monitor  
Others  
CD-ROM drive  
USB port as standard equipment  
* Operation is not guaranteed on all computers meeting the system requirements.  
* The system requirements describe the minimum environment for playing movies.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installing the Software  
Windows  
Install the image viewing/managing/editing software (MediaImpression  
3.0 for PENTAX).  
• Make sure your Windows PC meets the system requirements before  
installing the software.  
• When multiple accounts have been set up, log on with an account that  
has administrative rights before installing the software.  
1
Turn your Windows PC on.  
2
Insert the CD-ROM (S-SW117) into the CD-ROM drive.  
[Auto play] screen appears.  
Click [PENTAX Software Installer], and then click [Yes].  
If the installer screen does not appear  
Display the installer screen following the steps below.  
1) Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop.  
2) Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW117)] icon.  
If you are using Windows XP  
The “MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX” installer screen appears.  
3
4
Click [ArcSoft].  
The “Choose Setup Language” screen  
appears.  
8
Choose a language, and click  
[OK].  
The setup screen appears.  
Follow the on-screen guidance to  
install the software.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
Click [Finish].  
“MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX”  
installation is complete.  
Click [Exit] on the installation screen.  
The window closes.  
Macintosh  
Install the image viewing/managing/editing software (MediaImpression  
2.1 for PENTAX).  
1
Turn your Macintosh on.  
2
3
4
Insert the CD-ROM (S-SW117) into the CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW117) icon.  
Double-click the [Pentax Software Installer] icon.  
The “MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX” installer screen appears.  
5
Click [ArcSoft].  
The setup screen appears.  
Follow the on-screen guidance to  
install the software.  
8
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
7
Click [Close].  
“MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX”  
installation is complete.  
Click [Exit] on the installation screen.  
The window closes.  
Product Registration on the Internet  
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product  
registration.  
If your computer is connected to the  
Internet, please click [Product  
Registration] on the setup screen after the  
language selection screen is displayed.  
The world map screen shown on the right  
for Internet Product Registration is  
displayed. Click the displayed country or  
region and then follow the instructions to  
register your product.  
8
Only customers in countries and regions displayed on the software  
installation screen can register their products on the Internet Product  
Registration.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the USB Connection Mode  
Set the device to which the camera is connected with the USB cable.  
Make sure to set the USB connection mode before connecting your  
camera to the computer. You cannot perform the following setting if the  
camera is already connected to your computer with the USB cable.  
1
Turn your camera on.  
2
Press the 3 button in Q mode.  
The [W Setting] menu appears.  
When you press the 3 button in A mode, press the four-way  
controller (5) once.  
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USB  
Connection].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
A pull-down menu appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
Setting  
2/4  
(23) to select [MSC].  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Video Out  
Date  
MSC  
PTP  
Auto  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Brightness Level  
MENU  
OK  
OK  
Cancel  
8
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to A mode or Q mode.  
Proceed to the following pages depending on your computer.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MSC and PTP  
MSC (Mass Storage Class)  
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to the  
computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard for  
controlling USB devices with this driver.  
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage Class,  
you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without installing a  
dedicated driver.  
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)  
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital  
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.  
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP without  
installing a device driver.  
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the camera to  
your computer.  
8
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connecting to a Windows PC  
Connecting the Camera and Your Windows PC  
Connect your camera to the Windows PC using the provided USB cable  
(I-USB7).  
1
2
3
Turn your Windows PC on.  
Turn your camera off.  
Connect your camera to the Windows PC using the USB  
cable.  
Connect the terminal of the USB cable with arrow mark  
facing the  
front side of the camera.  
8
4
Turn your camera on.  
The “AutoPlay” screen appears.  
If the “AutoPlay” screen does not appear, follow the steps in “When the  
We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit K-AC117 when the  
camera is connected to the computer (p.43). If the battery runs out of  
power while images are being transmitted to the computer, the image  
data may be lost or damaged.  
The power lamp is lit while the camera is connected to a PC, whereas it  
blinks while the card is being accessed.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transferring Images  
Transfer the images captured with the camera to your Windows PC.  
If there is no SD Memory Card in the camera, the images stored in the  
built-in memory will be transferred to your Windows PC.  
5
Click [Import media files to  
local disk].  
The “MediaImpression 3.0 for  
PENTAX” starts.  
6
7
Set up [Destination Folder].  
Select the image/s you want to  
copy, then click [Import  
8
Selected].  
The selected images are copied to the  
PC.  
* To select two or more images, select  
them while pressing the Ctrl key.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Click [Done].  
When the “AutoPlay” Screen Does Not Appear  
5
Double-click the  
[MediaImpression 3.0 for  
PENTAX] icon on the desktop.  
6
7
Click [PhotoImpression].  
Click [Import].  
8
8
Specify [Get Media From].  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the volume label name  
appears instead of [Removable Disk]. A new unformatted SD Memory  
Card may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.  
9
Set up [Destination Folder].  
10 Select the image/s you want to  
copy, then click [Import  
Selected].  
The selected images are copied to the  
PC.  
* To select two or more images, select  
them while pressing the Ctrl key.  
11 Click [Done].  
8
Images are stored in folders named by the shooting date (“XXX_0808”  
for August 8. “XXX” is a three-digit number.).  
If [PENTX] is selected for [Folder Name] in the [W Setting] menu, a folder  
named “XXXPENTX” (XXX is a three-digit folder number) is displayed. If  
[_USER] is selected for [Folder Name], “xxxAAAAA” (xxx is a three-digit  
folder number, AAAAA is the 5-digit letters that you entered) is  
displayed. The images are stored there.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Windows PC  
1
Click the  
Hardware] icon in the task bar.  
[Safely Remove  
2
Click [Eject xxx (name of the  
camera)].  
A message appears indicating that the  
hardware can be safely removed.  
3
Disconnect the USB cable  
from your Windows PC and  
the camera.  
• If the camera (removable disk) is being used by an application such as  
“MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX”, the camera cannot be  
disconnected until the application is closed.  
• The camera will automatically switch to the playback mode when the  
USB cable is disconnected from your Windows PC or the camera.  
8
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting “MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX”  
“MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX” lets you view, edit, manage, search  
for, share, and print images.  
1
Double-click the [MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX]  
icon on the desktop.  
“MediaImpression 3.0 for PENTAX” starts and the main window  
appears.  
Media Window Interface  
A
B
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.  
A PhotoImpression  
8
You can view or manage still images. For example, you can import, edit  
and print images.  
B VideoImpression  
You can view or manage movies. For example, you can import and edit  
movies.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PhotoImpression  
A
B
C
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.  
A Views  
Displays the configuration of folders or groups sorted by your favorites,  
GPS information or a detected person.  
B Preview Area  
Displays the contents of the selected folder or sorted group.  
C Actions  
This panel provides editing/managing functions, such as an importing,  
editing, movie making.  
8
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Images  
1
Click [PhotoImpression] or  
[VideoImpression] from the  
main window.  
2
3
Select and click the folder or  
the group containing the image  
you want to view.  
Images are displayed.  
Select and double-click the  
image you want to view.  
The selected image is displayed with  
the viewer.  
With the viewer, you can enlarge/  
reduce the display size of the image or  
edit it and so on. You can also play back  
movies or sound files.  
8
Double-click the image to view it at full screen.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 3.0 for  
PENTAX”  
You can find more information on how to use “MediaImpression 3.0 for  
PENTAX” by using the help pages.  
1
Click [Help] from [Menu] on the menu bar.  
The help screen appears.  
2
Click the desired topic.  
An explanation is displayed.  
8
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting to a Macintosh  
Connecting the Camera and Your Macintosh  
Connect your camera to the Macintosh using the provided USB cable  
(I-USB7).  
1
2
3
Turn your Macintosh on.  
Turn your camera off.  
Connect your camera to the Macintosh using the USB  
cable.  
Connect the terminal of the USB cable with arrow mark  
facing the  
front side of the camera.  
8
4
Turn your camera on.  
The camera is recognized as [NO_NAME] on the  
desktop.  
We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit K-AC117 when the  
camera is connected to the computer (p.43). If the battery runs out of  
power while images are being transmitted to the computer, the image  
data may be lost or damaged.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the volume label name  
appears instead of [NO_NAME]. A new unformatted SD Memory Card  
may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.  
• The power lamp is lit while the camera is connected to a Macintosh,  
whereas it blinks while the card is being accessed.  
Transferring Images  
Transfer the images captured with the camera to your Macintosh.  
If there is no SD Memory Card in the camera, the images stored in the  
built-in memory will be transferred to your Macintosh.  
5
6
Double-click the [MediaImpression] folder inside the  
[Applications] folder.  
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX]  
icon.  
“MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX” starts and the main browser  
window appears.  
7
Set up [Destination Folder]  
and select [Subfolder Name].  
8
8
Select the image/s you want to  
copy, then click [Import].  
The selected image/s are copied to the  
PC.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9
Click [Done].  
Disconnecting the Camera from Your Macintosh  
1
Drag [NO_NAME] on the desktop to the trash.  
If the SD Memory Card has a volume label, drag the icon of that name  
to the trash.  
2
Disconnect the USB cable from your Macintosh and the  
camera.  
• If the camera (removable disk) is being used by an application such as  
“MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX”, the camera cannot be  
disconnected until the application is closed.  
• The camera will automatically switch to the playback mode when the  
USB cable is disconnected from your Macintosh or the camera.  
8
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting “MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX”  
“MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX” lets you view, edit, manage, search  
for, share, and print images.  
1
Double-click the [MediaImpression] folder inside the  
[Applications] folder.  
2
Double-click the [MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX]  
icon.  
“MediaImpression 2.1 for PENTAX” starts and the main browser  
window appears.  
Media Window Interface  
B
A
8
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.  
A Media browser tool  
You can view images, movies, or play back audio files.  
B Edit/Managing tool  
You can edit or manage images. For example, you can import, edit or  
print images.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media Browser Interface  
B
A
C
* The screen shown is an example with the default settings.  
A Views  
Displays the configuration of folders in your computer. When you browse  
a folder, the contents of the folder appear in the media thumbnail pane.  
B Preview Area  
Displays the contents of the selected folder or the results of the most  
recent search (the file or folder that matches the search item).  
C Actions  
This panel provides editing/managing functions, such as an importing,  
editing, movie making.  
8
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Images  
1
Click [Pictures], [Videos], or [All Media] from the main  
window.  
2
3
Select and click the folder containing the image you  
want to view in the folder pane.  
Images are displayed in the media thumbnail pane.  
Select and double-click the image you want to view in  
the media thumbnail pane.  
The selected image is displayed with the  
viewer.  
With the viewer, you can enlarge/reduce  
the display size of the image or edit it  
and so on. You can also play back  
movies or sound files.  
Details on How to Use “MediaImpression 2.1 for  
PENTAX”  
You can find more information on how to use “MediaImpression 2.1 for  
PENTAX” by using the help pages.  
8
1
Select [ArcSoft MediaImpression Help] from [Help] on  
the menu bar.  
The help screen appears.  
2
Click the desired topic.  
An explanation is displayed.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transferring Images Using an Eye-Fi  
Card  
You can automatically transfer images or movies to a computer or similar  
devices via wireless LAN using a memory card that is equipped with the  
wireless LAN (Eye-Fi card) function.  
1
Specify the wireless LAN access point and transfer  
destination on the Eye-Fi card.  
For details on how to set up the card, refer to the operating manual  
supplied with the Eye-Fi card.  
2
3
4
5
Turn the camera off.  
Insert an Eye-Fi card that has been set up.  
Turn the camera on.  
Set [Eye-Fi] in the [W Setting] menu to O (On).  
The images are transferred automatically. For details on how to set up  
The following icons appear on the display.  
During Eye-Fi communication. The camera is  
communicating or searching for the access point when  
[Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).  
Eye-Fi communication waiting. The camera is not  
communicating when [Eye-Fi] is set to O (on).  
8
Eye-Fi communication prohibited. When [Eye-Fi] is set to  
P (off).  
Eye-Fi version error. The version of the Eye-Fi card is out  
of date or the card is write-protected.  
Acceptable Eye-Fi cards  
• Eye-Fi Share  
• Eye-Fi Share Video 4 GB  
• Eye-Fi Pro X2 8GB*  
• Eye-Fi Explore X2 8GB*  
* Not available for Endless Memory mode.  
Run the latest firmware on your Eye-Fi card.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• When you use a new Eye-Fi card, copy the install file of Eye-Fi  
Manager stored on the card to your computer before you format the  
card.  
• Do not use an Eye-Fi card, or set [Eye-Fi] to P (Off) in a location where  
wireless LAN devices are restricted or prohibited, such as on planes  
(since images are transferred via wireless LAN).  
• If you insert an older version Eye-Fi card in the camera, an error  
message appears.  
• Images are not transferred in the following cases:  
- When available wireless LAN access points are not found.  
- When the battery level is low (  
(yellow) or  
(red) is indicated).  
• Voice recording sound files cannot be transferred.  
• We recommend that you use an AC adapter (optional) when you  
transfer a large number of images because this often requires long  
transferring times.  
• While images are being transferred, the Auto Power Off does not  
function.  
• If you transfer large-sized files, such as a movie, the temperature  
inside the camera increases and the camera may be automatically  
turned off to protect the circuit.  
• To transfer images via wireless LAN, use of an access point, an  
Internet environment, and configuration are required. For details, refer  
to the Internet website (http://www.eye.fi).  
• For details on how to use an Eye-Fi card, refer to the operating manual  
supplied with the Eye-Fi card.  
• If you have a problem with the Eye-Fi card, contact the manufacturer  
of the card.  
• The camera is equipped with a function that sets Eye-Fi  
communication on or off, however, this does not guarantee availability  
of all the functions on the Eye-Fi card.  
• Use of the Eye-Fi card is permitted only in the country where you  
purchased the card. Follow the laws of that country.  
8
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Appendix  
Mode .........................................................284  
Messages .................................................287  
Troubleshooting ......................................289  
Default Settings .......................................291  
List of World Time Cities ........................296  
Optional Accessories .............................297  
Main Specifications ................................298  
Warranty Policy .......................................303  
Index .........................................................308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Functions Available for Each Shooting  
Mode  
: Can be set. ×: Cannot be set. : Settings and changes are not applied.  
Shooting Mode  
a b B c R  
b A A C  
\ UK  
B
Function  
*2 *3 *3 *4 *3 *4  
*3  
*3 *5  
Zoom button Zoom operation  
Face Detection On  
×
×
Smile Capture  
Ibutton  
Self-portrait Assist / Self-portrait  
Assist + Smile Capture  
Face Detection Off  
*33 *33 *33  
×
*33  
×
*33  
*33  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×*8  
×
Auto  
Flash Off  
Flash On  
Auto + Red-eye  
Flash On + Red-eye  
Standard  
,
a
b
c
d
×
Flash Mode  
×
×
9
Self-timer  
gZ  
Continuous Shooting/  
Burst Shooting  
Remote Control  
Interval Shoot  
Auto Bracketing  
Standard  
Macro  
1cm Macro  
Pan Focus  
×
×
×
×
×
jc  
Drive Mode  
Focus Mode  
×
×
×
×*9  
*11  
×*22  
×*26  
×
×
×
×
×
×
hi  
k
l
=
q
×
×*9  
3
s
z
Infinity  
Manual Focus  
×*9 ×*9  
×*9  
Image Tone  
*11 *11 *11 *12 *11 *12  
*11 ×*13  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
×*22  
×*23  
×*26  
×*20  
*24  
×*20  
×*22  
×*26  
×*22 ×*22  
*24  
×
Focusing Area  
AF  
×
Auto Macro  
Focus Assist  
Setting  
×
×*25  
×*8  
9
×*26 ×*26 ×*26  
AE Metering  
Sensitivity  
×*27  
×*29  
×*8  
×*8  
×*27  
×*29  
×*8  
×*8  
[A Rec.  
Mode] menu  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR*1  
Blink Detection  
Sharpness/Saturation (Tone  
Adjustment)/Contrast  
Date Imprint  
×*31  
×*8  
×*32  
×*32 ×*32  
×*32  
×*32  
×*8  
×*8  
×*8  
×*8  
×*25  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting Mode  
X c Q e S F  
9
N
Function  
×
*6 *3 *3  
*3 *3 *6 *7  
Zoom operation  
Zoom button  
×
Face Detection On  
Smile Capture  
Ibutton  
Self-portrait Assist / Self-portrait  
Assist + Smile Capture  
Face Detection Off  
×
*33 *33  
×
*33  
×
*33  
×
*33  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Auto  
Flash Off  
,
a
Flash On  
Flash Mode  
b
c
d
9
Auto + Red-eye  
Flash On + Red-eye  
Standard  
Self-timer  
gZ  
Continuous Shooting/  
Burst Shooting  
Remote Control  
Interval Shoot  
Auto Bracketing  
Standard  
Macro  
1cm Macro  
Pan Focus  
×
×
×
×
×
jc  
Drive Mode  
Focus Mode  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
hi  
k
l
=
q
×
×
×
3
s
z
×
Infinity  
Manual Focus  
×*9 ×*9 ×*9  
×*10  
Image Tone  
×*14 ×*15 *11 *11  
*16 ×*17 ×*18 ×*19  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
Focusing Area  
Auto Macro  
*24  
×*21  
×*22 ×*22 ×*22  
×*22 ×*22  
×*23  
×
×*23  
×*25  
×*25  
AF Setting  
×
Focus Assist  
9
×*26 ×*26 ×*26  
×*26 ×*26  
AE Metering  
×*8  
×*8  
×*27  
×*30  
×*28  
×
×*30  
×*27  
Sensitivity  
[A Rec.  
Mode] menu  
×*31  
×*8  
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
D-Range Setting  
Pixel Track SR*1  
Blink Detection  
×*8 ×*8 *8  
×*8  
×*25  
Sharpness/Saturation (Tone  
Adjustment)/Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
×*32 ×*32 ×*32  
×*32 ×*32  
×
×
×
×
×*8  
×*9  
×*8  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*1 Movie SR is used for movies, while  
Pixel Track SR is used for still pictures.  
*2 Flowers cannot be detected when  
using Digital Zoom or Intelligent Zoom.  
*3 Optical zoom is always possible,  
digital zoom and intelligent zoom  
cannot be used if the Sensitivity  
selection is ISO 3200/6400.  
*4 Before shooting only optical zoom and  
digital zoom are possible, during  
shooting only digital zoom is possible.  
*5 Only optical zoom and intelligent zoom  
are possible, digital zoom cannot be  
used.  
*6 Only optical zoom is possible, digital  
zoom and intelligent zoom cannot be  
used.  
*7 Only optical zoom and digital zoom are  
possible, intelligent zoom cannot be  
used.  
*13 Fixed to h  
*14 Fixed to h for individual pictures,  
and fixed to f for composite images.  
*15 Fixed to f/  
*16 Fixed to i for individual pictures,  
and fixed to f for composite 3  
images.  
*17 Fixed to h/h  
*18 Fixed to V  
*19 Fixed to g  
*20 Fixed to C (Best) equivalent  
*21 Fixed to D (Better)  
*22 Fixed to F  
*23 Fixed to J (Multi)  
*24 W (Automatic Tracking AF) is not  
available  
*25 Fixed to O (On)  
*26 Fixed to L (Multi-segment metering)  
*27 Fixed to AUTO  
*8 Fixed to P (Off)  
*9 Fixed at Natural  
*28 The sensitivity is fixed at its minimum  
setting  
*29 Fixed at 80-800  
*10 Fixed at Bright  
*30 Fixed at 80-6400  
*11 Fixed to f/  
when the  
Sensitivity selection is ISO 3200/6400.  
*12 Set in [Movie] on the [A Rec. mode]  
menu  
*31 Fixed at ±0.0  
*32 Fixed as standard  
*33 Not available when the Macro Light is on  
9
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messages  
Messages such as the following may appear on the display during  
camera operation.  
Message  
Battery depleted  
Memory card full  
Description  
The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery using the  
battery charger (p.38).  
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images can be  
saved.  
Insert a new SD Memory Card or delete unwanted images.  
Change the recorded pixels or quality level of recorded  
images and try again (p.188).  
The card memory is not  
enough to copy images/  
sounds  
Shooting and playback are impossible due to a problem  
with the SD Memory Card. You may be able to display or  
copy the images on the card using a computer.  
Memory card error  
The built-in memory is  
not formatted  
The data within the built-in memory are damaged. Format  
the built-in memory.  
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is unformatted or  
has been formatted on a computer or other device and is  
not compatible with this camera. Format the SD Memory  
Card in the camera (p.230).  
Card is not formatted  
Card is locked  
The SD Memory Card is write-protected (p.47).  
This message occurs when the camera fails to compress an  
image. Change the quality level or recorded pixels of the  
image and try shooting or saving it again.  
Compression error  
There are no image or sound files on the SD Memory Card  
or the built-in memory.  
No image/sound  
This message appears when the internal temperature of the  
Movie recording stopped camera has exceeded normal operating limits while  
recording a movie.  
This message appears when deleting an image or sound  
Deleting  
file.  
9
You are trying to play back an image or sound in a format  
Camera cannot play this  
not supported by this camera. You may be able to play it  
image and sound  
back on another brand of camera or on your computer.  
The largest file number (9999) has been assigned to an  
Image folder cannot be image in the largest folder number (999) and no more  
created  
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card or  
format the card/built-in memory (p.230).  
Protected  
The image or sound file you are trying to delete is protected.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Message  
Description  
Displayed when you try to switch to Q mode while an  
image is still being recorded, or when the protect setting or  
DPOF setting is being changed. It disappears after the  
image is recorded or the setting is changed.  
Data being recorded  
Displayed when the camera takes more than five seconds  
to display an image due to image processing, or when the  
SD Memory Card or the built-in memory is being formatted.  
Data being processed  
Built-in memory full  
Displayed if the built-in memory is full when saving a file.  
No image to be  
processed  
Displayed when there are no images or sound files.  
This image/sound  
cannot be processed  
Displayed for files that cannot be processed.  
Displayed if no SD Memory Card is inserted when “Image/  
Sound Copy” is selected from the Playback Mode Palette  
and the OK button is pressed.  
No card in the camera  
The built-in memory is  
not enough to copy  
images/sounds  
Displayed when there is insufficient built-in memory to  
perform copying.  
Cannot process  
correctly  
Displayed when Red-eye Compensation processing fails.  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
Displayed when the battery is too low during Pixel Mapping.  
Change the battery (p.39) or use the AC adapter kit  
activate Pixel Mapping K-AC117 (optional) (p.43).  
No more images can be Displayed when you select more than the maximum  
selected  
number of images.  
The camera will turn off  
to prevent damage from  
overheating  
Appears when the temperature inside the camera exceeds  
the highest limit.  
No more logs can be  
recorded.  
Delete the record?  
Displayed when there is no capacity to save a log in the  
card, or there is a log with the 999 serial number. (Optio  
WG-1 GPS only)  
9
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Check if a battery is installed. If not,  
install a battery.  
The battery is not installed  
Check orientation of the battery.  
Reinsert the battery according to the  
+- symbols in the battery  
compartment (p.39).  
The camera will  
not turn on  
The battery is installed  
incorrectly  
The battery is exhausted  
Charge the battery.  
The camera is connected to The display is off when the camera  
a computer is connected to a computer.  
No image appears The camera is connected to The display is off when the camera  
on the display  
a TV  
is connected to a TV.  
Press the 4/W button to  
turn the display on.  
The display is set to off.  
Adjust the brightness level in  
[Brightness Level] in the [W Setting]  
menu. (p.248)  
The brightness level of the  
display is set too dark  
When the Power Saving function is  
on, the display automatically  
darkens after a certain amount of  
time. Press a button to return to the  
normal brightness level.  
The display is  
hard to see  
Power Saving function is on  
Select [Off] in [Power Saving] in the  
[W Setting] menu to turn the Power  
Saving function off (p.249).  
Pictures cannot be taken while the  
flash is charging. Wait until charging  
is finished.  
The flash is charging  
The shutter will  
not release  
There is no available space Insert an SD Memory Card with  
on the SD Memory Card or available space or delete unwanted  
9
in the built-in memory  
images (p.45, 176).  
Recording  
Wait until recording is finished.  
The picture becomes dark if the  
subject is too far away. Take  
pictures within the specified flash  
range.  
The picture is dark The subject is too far away  
when using the  
flash  
in a dark environment, such  
as a night scene  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The camera may have difficulty in  
focusing on such subjects as: low  
contrast subjects (a white wall, a  
blue sky, etc.), dark subjects, finely-  
patterned objects, rapidly-moving  
objects. It is also difficult to get  
proper focus when shooting through  
a window or a net (p.76). Try  
The subject is difficult to  
focus on with autofocus  
The subject is not  
in focus  
shooting using the focus lock, or  
\ (Manual Focus) (p.120).  
Locate the desired subject in the  
focus frame (focusing area) in the  
center of the display. If it is difficult to  
do so, first lock the focus on the  
desired subject (focus lock), and  
then move the camera to  
The subject is not in the  
focusing area  
recompose.  
The flash mode is set to  
Set to , (Auto) or b (Flash On)  
a (Flash Off)  
(p.117).  
The Drive Mode is set to  
j (Continuous Shooting),  
c (Burst Shooting), or  
l (Auto Bracketing);  
The flash does not  
discharge  
the Focus Mode is set to  
The flash does not discharge in  
s (Infinity); or the Shooting these modes.  
Mode is set to d (Movie),  
(Underwater Movie),  
S(Fireworks) or  
(Digital Microscope).  
Very occasionally, static electricity may cause camera to malfunction. In  
this case, remove the battery and install it again. If the camera is then  
working properly, you can continue using the camera.  
9
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Settings  
The table below lists the factory default settings.  
The meaning of the indications for menu items with a default setting is  
explained below.  
Last Memory Setting  
Yes  
: The current setting (last memory) is saved when the  
camera is turned off.  
No  
: The setting returns to the default setting when the camera  
is turned off.  
*
: The setting depends on the [Memory] setting (p.158).  
: N/A  
Reset Setting  
Yes  
: The setting returns to the default setting with the Reset  
function (p.255).  
No  
: The setting is saved even after reset.  
: N/A  
  [A Rec. Mode] Menu Items  
Last  
Memory  
Setting  
Default Setting  
(Shooting mode:A)  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Page  
Image Tone  
Bright  
g (4288×3216)  
D (Better)  
F (Auto)  
J (Multiple)  
O (On)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
White Balance  
Focusing Area  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
AF  
Setting  
Auto Macro  
9
Focus Assist  
O (On)  
AE Metering  
L (Multi-segment)  
AUTO (80-800)  
80-800  
Sensitivity  
*
AUTO ISO Range  
EV Compensation  
*
±0.0  
*
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Last  
Memory  
Setting  
Default Setting  
(Shooting mode:A)  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Page  
M
Recorded Pixels  
Movie SR  
Yes  
Yes  
(1280×720/30 fps)  
O (On)  
1 min.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Movie  
Interval  
Interval  
Shoot  
Total Time  
10 min.  
Start Delay  
In 0 hr. 0 min.  
P (Off)  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
D-Range  
Setting  
P (Off)  
Pixel Track SR  
P (Off)  
Interval  
0 min. 10 sec.  
2
Interval  
Shoot  
Number of Shots  
Start Delay  
In 0 hr. 0 min.  
O (On)  
Blink Detection  
Digital Zoom  
O (On)  
Instant Review  
O (On)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Face Detection  
P (Off)  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
O (On)  
P (Off)  
Focus Mode  
Zoom Position  
MF Position  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
Memory White Balance  
Sensitivity  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
EV Compensation  
AE Metering  
Digital Zoom  
DISPLAY  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
O (On)  
P (Off)  
9
File No.  
O (On)  
Green Button  
Sharpness  
Green Mode  
G (Normal)  
G (Normal)  
G (B&W)  
G (Normal)  
P (Off)  
Saturation  
Tone Adjustment  
Contrast  
Date Imprint  
IQ Enhancer  
Macro Light  
O (On)  
P (Off)  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
  [W Setting] Menu Items  
Last  
Default Setting Memory  
Setting  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Page  
Operation Volume  
Playback Volume  
Start-up Sound  
Shutter Sound  
Operation Sound  
Self-timer Sound  
3
3
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1
1
Sound  
1
1
According to  
initial setting  
24h  
Date Format (Date)  
Yes  
No  
Date Format (time)  
Date  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Date  
Adjustment  
1/1/2011  
According to  
initial setting  
Time  
Yes  
No  
Alarm  
Time  
P (Off)  
0:00  
Same as W  
Hometown  
According to  
initial setting  
P (Off)  
According to  
initial setting  
P (Off)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Alarm  
Select Time  
Yes  
Yes  
Destination (City)  
Destination (DST)  
Hometown (City)  
Hometown (DST)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
World  
Time  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Text Size  
Standard  
According to  
initial setting  
Yes  
No  
Language/  
*1  
Folder Name  
USB Connection  
Date  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
MSC  
According to  
initial setting  
Video Out  
Yes  
No  
HDMI Out  
Eye-Fi  
Auto  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
9
P (Off)  
G
5 sec.  
Brightness Level  
Power Saving  
Auto Power Off  
Quick Zoom  
Guide Display  
Reset  
Delete All  
Pixel Mapping  
Format  
3 min.  
P (Off)  
O (On)  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Last  
Default Setting Memory  
Setting  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Page  
GPS Setting  
Logging  
Auto Time Synch.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
*2  
GPS  
GPS Guide  
*1 Except the folder name that you created  
*2 Optio WG-1 GPS only  
  Playback Mode Palette Items  
Last Memory Reset  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Setting  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Setting  
Interval  
Slideshow Screen Effect  
Sound Effect  
3 sec.  
Wipe  
Yes  
Yes  
On  
Image Rotation  
Normal  
Approx. 7%  
3
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Small Face Filter  
Ink Rubbing Filter  
Recorded Pixels  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
h/h  
Layout  
Collage  
Background  
White  
Select image(s)  
Digital Filter  
B&W/Sepia  
No  
Blur  
All sides/White  
No  
Original  
Frame  
Edge Composite  
All sides/White  
No  
Frame Composite  
Default1  
Yes  
Save as Still Image  
Movie  
Editing  
Divide Movies  
Adding title picture  
Red-eye Compensation  
Depending on the  
picture taken  
9
Recorded Pixels  
Resize  
Depending on the  
picture taken  
Quality Level  
Depending on the  
picture taken  
Cropping  
Built-in memory  
Image/Sound Copy  
Voice Memo  
SD Memory Card  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Last Memory Reset  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Setting  
Setting  
Single Image/  
Sound  
Depending on the  
recorded image/sound  
Protect  
DPOF  
All Images/  
Sounds  
Depending on the  
recorded image/sound  
Single Image  
All Images  
Copies: 0  
Date: Off  
O (On)  
Start-up Screen  
  Key Operation  
Item  
Yes  
Last  
Memory  
Setting  
Reset  
Setting  
Function  
Default Setting  
Page  
Operation Mode  
Zoom Position  
Q button  
Q Mode  
w/x button  
Full wide-angle  
*
No  
p.103-  
2
Drive Mode  
9 (Standard)  
*
Yes  
Four-way  
controller  
3
4
5
Shooting Mode  
Flash Mode  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
b (Auto Picture)  
*
*
, (Auto)  
Focus Mode  
= (Standard)  
Shooting mode:  
[
A
Rec. Mode] menu  
3 button  
Menu Display  
Playback mode:  
[W Setting] menu  
Information  
Display  
4/W  
Standard  
*
Yes  
button  
Face Detection  
On  
Operation Mode  
Function Recall  
*
Yes  
Yes  
Ibutton  
Green Mode  
Yes  
Green Button  
9
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of World Time Cities  
City: indicates cities that can be set as either the Initial Setting (p.51) or  
the World Time (p.237).  
Video Output Format: indicates the video output format of the city set  
as the Initial Setting.  
Video output  
format  
Videooutput  
format  
Region  
North  
City name  
Honolulu  
Region  
City name  
Istanbul  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
PAL  
Africa/West  
Asia  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
NTSC  
America  
Anchorage  
Vancouver  
San Francisco  
Los Angeles  
Calgary  
Cairo  
Jerusalem  
Nairobi  
Jeddah  
Tehran  
Denver  
Dubai  
Chicago  
Miami  
Karachi  
Kabul  
Toronto  
Male  
New York  
Halifax  
Delhi  
Colombo  
Kathmandu  
Dacca  
Central and  
South  
America  
Mexico City  
Lima  
Santiago  
Caracas  
Buenos Aires  
Sao Paulo  
Rio de Janeiro  
Lisbon  
East Asia  
Yangon  
Bangkok  
Kuala Lumpur  
Vientiane  
Singapore  
Phnom Penh  
Ho Chi Minh  
Jakarta  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
Europe  
Madrid  
PAL  
London  
PAL  
Paris  
PAL  
Hong Kong  
Beijing  
Amsterdam  
Milan  
PAL  
PAL  
Shanghai  
Manila  
Rome  
PAL  
9
Copenhagen  
Berlin  
PAL  
Taipei  
PAL  
Seoul  
Prague  
PAL  
Tokyo  
Stockholm  
Budapest  
Warsaw  
Athens  
PAL  
Guam  
PAL  
Oceania  
Perth  
PAL  
Adelaide  
Sydney  
Noumea  
Wellington  
Auckland  
Pago Pago  
PAL  
Helsinki  
PAL  
Moscow  
Dakar  
PAL  
Africa/West  
Asia  
PAL  
Algiers  
PAL  
Johannesburg  
PAL  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Optional Accessories  
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera.  
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with  
the camera.  
  Power supply  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92 (*)  
Battery charger kit K-BC92 (*)  
(Battery charger D-BC92, AC plug cord)  
AC adapter kit K-AC117  
(AC adapter D-AC115, DC coupler D-DC92, AC plug cord)  
The battery charger and AC adapter are only sold as a set.  
  Cable  
USB cable I-USB7 (*)  
AV cable I-AVC7 (*)  
  Strap  
O-ST104 (*)  
O-ST117 (*)  
O-ST118 (*)  
O-ST24  
O-ST8  
Genuine leather strap.  
Silver chain strap.  
Waterproof strap.  
O-ST81  
  Optio WG-1 Skin  
9
O-CC1182 (Available in the near future)  
This cover protects the camera from scratches and  
light impacts.  
  Remote Control  
REMOTE CONTROL WATERPROOF O-RC1  
REMOTE CONTROL E  
REMOTE CONTROL F  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Main Specifications  
Type  
Fully automatic compact digital still camera with built-in zoom lens  
Number of effective Approx. 14 megapixels  
pixels  
Image sensor  
1/2.3 inch CCD  
Number of recorded Still  
pixels  
g (4288×3216), j (3216×3216), i (4224×2376),  
6 (3072×2304),  
(3072×1728), f (2592×1944),  
(2592×1464), h (2048×1536), h (1920×1080),  
l (1024×768), m (640×480)  
*
Fixed at f/  
in Digital SR mode.  
in Frame Composite mode.  
* Fixed at  
*
*
h
/
h
Fixed at f in Digital Wide mode, however, the first frame uses h.  
Fixed at i for one frame in Digital Panorama mode.  
* Fixed at h in Digital Microscope mode.  
*
*
Fixed at f/  
when the sensitivity is set to 3200 or 6400.  
in Burst Shooting mode.  
Fixed at f/  
* Fixed at V (1280×960) in Report mode.  
Movie M (1280×720/30 fps), F (1280×720/15 fps)  
G (640×480/30 fps), H (640×480/15 fps)  
I (320×240/30 fps), J (320×240/15 fps)  
Sensitivity  
File format  
AUTO, Manual (ISO 80-6400)  
* The sensitivity is fixed at AUTO (80-6400) in Digital SR mode.  
Still  
JPEG (Exif 2.3), DCF 2.0, DPOF,  
PRINT Image Matching III  
Movie AVI (Motion JPEG), approx. 30 fps/15 fps, PCM system,  
monaural sound, Movie SR (Movie Shake Reduction)  
Sound Voice memo, voice recording: WAVE (PCM) system,  
monaural  
Quality level  
Still  
C “Best”, D “Better”, E “Good”  
Movie Fixed at C (Best) *Unchangeable  
Built-in memory (approx. 97.0 MB), SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory  
Card, SDXC Memory Card  
Storage media  
9
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Recording Time  
Still  
2 GB  
SD Memory Card  
Built-in Memory  
C
D
E
C
D
E
19  
39  
61  
394  
778  
1205  
g
(4288×3216)  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
24 49 70 487 975 1397  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
24 49 70 487 975 1397  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
33 61 81 653 1205 1617  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
39 75 109 778 1499 2119  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
39 75 109 778 1499 2119  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
49 98 151 975 1921 2927  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
61 121 177 1205 2364 3415  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
90 177 238 1756 3415 4728  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
141 258 365 2794 5122 6830  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
214 365 477 4098 6830 8782  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
443 690 776 8782 12294 15368  
pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures pictures  
j (3216×3216)  
i (4224×2376)  
6
f
h
(3072×2304)  
(3072×1728)  
(2592×1944)  
(2592×1464)  
(2048×1536)  
h (1920×1080)  
V
l
m
(1280×960)  
(1024×768)  
(640×480)  
• The image storage capacity is for reference only. The actual image storage capacity  
may vary depending on the SD Memory Card and the subject.  
V (1280×960) can only be set for recorded pixels when  
(Report) mode is set.  
Movie/Sound  
9
2 GB  
SD Memory Card  
Built-in Memory  
M (1280×720/30 fps)  
F (1280×720/15 fps)  
30 sec.  
1min.  
10 min. 8 sec.  
19 min. 42 sec.  
G
(640×480/30 fps)  
(640×480/15 fps)  
(320×240/30 fps)  
(320×240/15 fps)  
1min. 28 sec.  
2min. 47 sec.  
2min. 15 sec.  
4min. 8 sec.  
26min. 30 sec.  
29 min. 16 sec.  
53 min. 55 sec.  
44 min. 32 sec.  
1 hr. 18 min. 48 sec.  
8 hr. 44 min. 34 sec.  
H
I
J
Sound  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• The above figures are based on our standard shooting conditions and may vary  
depending on the subject, shooting conditions and type of the SD Memory Card  
used.  
• Recording can continue until the built-in memory or the SD Memory Card is full, or  
the size of the recorded movie reaches 2 GB (when using an SDHC card). If  
recording stops at 2 GB, start recording again to continue to record the rest of the  
movie in blocks of 2 GB.  
White balance  
Lens  
Auto, Daylight, Shade, Tungsten Light, Fluores. Light, Manual  
Focal Length  
5.0 - 25.0 mm  
(approx. 28 mm - 140 mm in 35 mm equivalent  
focal length)  
Aperture  
F3.5 (W) - F5.5 (T)  
Lens Composition 11 elements in 9 groups (5 aspherical elements)  
Zoom Type  
5×  
Electrically driven  
Optical zoom  
Intelligent zoom  
6/  
: approx. 7×, f/  
:approx. 8.3×,  
h: approx. 10.5×, h: approx. 11.2×, l: approx. 20.9×,  
m: approx. 33.5× (when combined with optical zoom)  
Digital zoom  
Max. approx. 6.7× (combines with 5× optical zoom to give zoom  
magnification equivalent to 33.5×)  
Motion blur reduction Still  
Electronic shake reduction (Pixel Track SR),  
Hi-sensitivity shake reduction (Digital SR)  
Movie  
Electronic movie shake reduction (Movie SR)  
Display  
2.7 inch wide-LCD, approx. 230,000 dots (AR coating (cover only))  
Playback modes  
Single-frame, 6-frame, 12-frame, Enlargement (max. 10×, scrollable),  
Face Close-up Playback, Pet Close-up Playback, Folder Display,  
Calendar Display, Sound Playback, Histogram Display, Bright and  
Dark Area Compensation, Select & Delete, Slideshow, Resize,  
Cropping, Image/Sound Copy, Image Rotation, Digital Filter, Original  
Frame, Ink Rubbing Filter, Collage, Small Face Filter, Movie  
Playback/Edit (Save as Still image, Divide, Adding title picture),  
Frame Composite, Red-eye Compensation, Voice Memo, Protect,  
DPOF, Start-up Screen  
Focus mode  
Autofocus, Macro, 1cm Macro, Pan Focus, Infinity, Manual Focus  
9
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Focus  
Type  
TTL contrast detection system by sensor  
Multiple (9-point autofocus)/spot/automatic  
tracking AF changeable  
Focus range  
(From lens face) Macro  
Standard  
: 0.5 m - (Full zoom range)  
: 0.1 m - 0.6 m (Full zoom range)  
1cm Macro : 0.01 m - 0.3 m (At the intermediate  
position of the zoom range)  
* It is possible to switch to Infinity, Pan Focus and  
Manual Focus.  
* Face Detection AF is available only when the  
camera recognizes the subject’s face.  
Focus Lock  
AE Metering  
By half-pressing the shutter release button  
Exposure control  
Face detection  
Multi-segment metering, Center-weighted  
metering, Spot metering  
EV Compensation ±2 EV (can be set in 1/3 EV steps)  
Detection of up to 32 people’s faces (up to 31 face detection frames  
on the display), Smile Capture, Blink Detection, Self-portrait Assist,  
Self-portrait Assist + Smile Capture  
* Face Detection AE is available only when the camera detects the  
subject’s face.  
Pet detection  
Registering: 3, Detecting: 1  
Shooting mode  
Auto Picture, Program, Night Scene, Movie, Underwater, Underwater  
Movie, Landscape, Flower, Portrait, Digital Wide, Surf & Snow, Digital  
SR, Kids, Pet, Sport, Fireworks, Candlelight, Night Scene Portrait,  
Text, Food, Digital Panorama, Frame Composite, Report, Digital  
Microscope, Green, Voice Recording (can be used when Fn Setting  
assigned)  
Digital filter  
Movie  
B&W/Sepia, Toy Camera, Retro, Color (red, pink, purple, blue, green,  
yellow), Extract Color (red, green, blue), Color Emphasis (Sky Blue,  
Fresh Green, Delicate Pink, Autumn Leaves), High Contrast,  
Starburst (Cross, Heart, Star), Soft, Fish-eye, Brightness, Miniature  
Continuous  
Approx. 1 second - until built-in memory or SD Memory  
Card is full (however, maximum size is limited to 2 GB)  
Recording Time  
Shutter speed  
Built-in flash  
1/1500 sec. - 1/4 sec., max. 4 sec. (Night Scene mode)  
Modes  
Auto, Flash Off, Flash On, Auto + Red-eye, Flash  
On + Red-eye  
Flash Range  
Wide-angle: approx. 0.3 m - 3.9 m  
(approx. 0.98 ft - 12.8 ft) (Sensitivity: in Auto condition)  
Telephoto: approx. 0.3 m - 2.5 m  
9
(approx. 0.98 ft - 8.2 ft) (Sensitivity: in Auto condition)  
Drive mode  
Self-timer  
Single-frame, Self-timer (approx. 10 sec., approx. 2 sec.), Continuous  
Shooting, Burst Shooting, Remote Control (3-sec Remote Control,  
0-sec Remote Control), Interval Shoot, Auto Bracketing  
Electronic control type, control time: Approx. 10 sec., 2 sec.  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time function  
World Time  
Clock Mode  
75 cities (28 time zones)  
Clock display by holding down 4/W  
button while camera is turned off (approx. 10 sec.)  
Alarm  
Alarm with simultaneous display of the Clock  
mode at specified time  
Power source  
Battery life  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI92, AC adapter kit (optional)  
Image Storage  
Capacity  
* Recording capacity shows approximate number  
of shots recorded during CIPA-compliant testing  
(with display on, flash used for 50% of the shots,  
and 23°C or 73.4°F). Actual performance may  
vary according to operating conditions.  
Approx. 260  
pictures  
Playback Time  
* According to the results of in-house testing.  
Approx. 280 min.  
MovieRecording * According to the results of in-house testing.  
Time  
Approx. 120 min.  
SoundRecording * According to the results of in-house testing.  
Time  
Approx. 350 min.  
Interfaces  
USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible) /PC/AV terminal /  
HDMI terminal (Type D (Micro))  
Video output format NTSC/PAL (monaural)  
Waterproof and  
dustproof rating  
JIS waterproof grade 8 and JIS dustproof grade 6 (IP68) Continuous  
underwater picture-taking possible for 2 hours at depth of 10 m.  
Impact resistance  
rating  
PENTAX drop test (1.5 m height onto a 5 cm thick plywood surface)  
complying with MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.5-Shock testing.  
* Waterproof performance is not guaranteed if the camera is exposed  
to impact such as being dropped or hit.  
* The camera is not guaranteed to be free of trouble or damages  
under every condition.  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Approx. 115.5 (W) × 58.5 (H) × 28.5 (D) mm (excluding operating or  
protruding parts)  
Optio WG-1 GPS:  
Approx. 146g (excluding battery and SD Memory Card)  
Approx. 167g (including battery and SD Memory Card)  
9
Optio WG-1:  
Approx. 143g (excluding battery and SD Memory Card)  
Approx. 163g (including battery and SD Memory Card)  
Accessories  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery, Battery charger, AC plug cord, USB  
cable, AV cable, Software (CD-ROM), Strap, Carabiner strap, Macro  
stand, Operating Manual, Quick Guide, Utilities Guide for GPS (Optio  
WG-1 GPS only)  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty Policy  
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide photographic  
distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of material or workmanship  
for a period of twelve months from date of purchase. Service will be rendered, and  
defective parts will be replaced without cost to you within that period, provided the  
equipment does not show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage,  
mishandling, tampering, battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to  
operating instructions, or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The  
manufacturer or its authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or  
alterations except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for  
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential  
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or workmanship or  
otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of the manufacturer or its  
representatives under all guarantees or warranties, whether expressed or  
implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts as hereinbefore provided. No  
refunds will be made on repairs by non-authorized PENTAX service facilities.  
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period  
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period should  
be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment or to the  
manufacturer. If there is no representative of the manufacturer in your country,  
send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage prepaid. In this case, it will  
take a considerable length of time before the equipment can be returned to you  
owing to the complicated customs procedures required. If the equipment is  
covered by warranty, repairs will be made and parts replaced free of charge, and  
the equipment will be returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the  
equipment is not covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of  
its representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner. If  
your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to have it  
serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing fees may be  
charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that country. Notwithstanding  
this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer will be serviced free of charge  
according to this procedure and warranty policy. In any case, however, shipping  
charges and customs clearance fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date  
of your purchase when required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the  
purchase of your equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment  
for servicing, please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s  
authorized representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are  
sending it directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service  
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the service  
station to proceed with the servicing.  
9
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory rights.  
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in some  
countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we recommend  
that you review the warranty card supplied with your product at the time  
of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor in your country for more  
information and to receive a copy of the warranty policy.  
9
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European  
Union.  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For customers in USA  
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for  
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more  
of the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For customers in Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
9
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-  
003 du Canada.  
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY  
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. The lithium battery  
used in this camera contains perchlorate material, which may require  
special handling. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for  
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals  
We:  
PENTAX Imaging Company  
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.  
th  
Located at: 600 12 Street, Suite 300  
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.  
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131  
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein  
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital  
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit  
tested and found to be compliant with the standards. Records  
maintained continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be  
expected to be within the variation accepted, due to quantity production  
and testing on the statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may  
not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation. The above named party is responsible for ensuring that the  
equipment complies with the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.  
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera  
Model Number: Optio WG-1 GPS / Optio WG-1  
Contact person: Customer Service Manager  
Date and Place: February, 2011, Colorado  
9
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old  
Equipment and Used Batteries  
1. In the European Union  
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or  
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and  
electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with  
general household waste.  
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be  
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that  
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these  
products.  
Following the implementation by member states, private  
households within the EU states may return their used  
electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated  
collection facilities free of charge*.  
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your  
old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.  
*Please contact your local authority for further details.  
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that  
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and  
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the  
environment and human health which could otherwise arise  
due to inappropriate waste handling.  
2. In other countries outside the EU  
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you  
wish to discard these items, please contact your local  
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
9
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be  
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t  
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed  
on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.  
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):  
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation  
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you  
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the  
chemicals involved.  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Symbols  
Numerics  
6-Image Display/  
A
Adding sound  
Auto + Red-eye  
Auto F  
h 0-sec Remote Control  
9
B
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
C
E
F
Flash On + Red-eye  
D
9
G
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-segment metering L  
H
I
N
O
P
K
L
M
Manual K (White Balance)  
9
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R
Red-eye reduction  
Regarding Waterproof,  
Design ................................. 8  
T
S
U
9
V
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOYA CORPORATION  
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division  
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN  
(http://www.pentax.jp)  
PENTAX Europe Imaging Systems S.A.S.  
(European Headquarters) 112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil  
Cedex, FRANCE  
(HQ - http://www.pentax.eu/)  
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)  
PENTAX Imaging Systems Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY  
GmbH  
(http://www.pentax.de)  
PENTAX Imaging Systems PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks  
Limited  
SL3 8PN, U.K.  
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)  
PENTAX Imaging Company  
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.  
(Headquarters)  
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.  
(PENTAX Service Department)  
250 North 54th Street Chandler, Arizona 85226, U.S.A.  
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)  
PENTAX Canada Inc.  
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,  
CANADA (http://www.pentax.ca)  
PENTAX Trading  
(SHANGHAI) Limited  
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang  
Road, Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA  
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)  
http://www.pentax.jp/english  
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.  
53242  
Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2011  
H01-201102 Printed in Vietnam  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelco Stereo Receiver C2900M B User Manual
Pelco Stereo System ICISA6500 User Manual
Philips Cassette Player AQ 6688 11 User Manual
Philips Cassette Player AQ6691 00 User Manual
Philips Hair Care Product HP4666 15 User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings 22FDF6023 User Manual
Pioneer Speaker System PDP S64 User Manual
Planar Car Video System PXL2760MW User Manual
Porter Cable Saw 1350734 User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PC054300017 User Manual